Glucose-dependent insulinotropic polypeptide receptor antagonists and uses thereof

Abstract

Described herein are compounds of Formula (I) and their pharmaceutically acceptable salts, wherein R1, R2, R3, Rcy, A1, L1, L2, T1, T2, T3, T4, n1, t1, t2, and t3 are defined herein; their use as GIPR antagonists; pharmaceutical compositions containing such compounds and salts; and the use of such compounds and salts to treat or prevent, for example, obesity, weight gain, and / or T2DM.

Description

[0001] PC073194A

[0002] GLUCOSE-DEPENDENT INSULINOTROPIC POLYPEPTIDE RECEPTOR ANTAGONISTS AND USES THEREOF

[0003] This application claims the benefit of priority to U.S. Provisional Patent Application Serial No. 63 / 706,348 filed October 1 1 , 2024; to U.S. Provisional Patent Application Serial No. 63 / 706,697 filed October 13, 2024; and to U.S. Provisional Patent Application Serial No. 63 / 874,168 filed September 2, 2025, the disclosure of each of which is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety.

[0004] FIELD OF THE INVENTION

[0005] The present invention relates to new pharmaceutical compounds, pharmaceutical compositions containing the compounds, and use of the compounds as glucose-dependent insulinotropic polypeptide receptor (GIPR) antagonists.

[0006] BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION

[0007] Glucose-dependent insulinotropic polypeptide (GIP, formerly called gastric inhibitory polypeptide) is a 42-amino acid peptide secreted from K-cells in the small intestine (duodenum and jejunum). Human GIP is derived from the processing of proGIP, a 153-amino acid precursor encoded by a gene localized on chromosome 17 (See e.g., Inagaki et al., Mol Endocrinol 1989; 3:1014-1021 ; and Fehmann et al. Endocr Rev. 1995; 16:390-410). GIP secretion is induced by food ingestion. GIP is a known insulinotropic factor (or “incretin”) that enhances glucosedependent insulin secretion. GIP has additional physiological effects in multiple tissues, including the promotion of fat storage in the adipose. Intact GIP is rapidly inactivated by dipeptidyl peptidase 4 (DPPIV).

[0008] The GIP receptor (GIPR) belongs to the glucagon subfamily of class B1 G protein-coupled receptors (GPCRs) characterized by an extracellular N-terminal domain, seven transmembrane domains and an intracellular C-terminus (See e.g. Zhao et al. Nat Commun. 2022, 13:1057). The N-terminal extracellular domain forms the primary peptide recognition and binding site of the receptor. Upon stimulation with GIP, GIPR undergoes structural changes from inactive to active conformations, thereby triggering a Gas-mediated increase in cAMP production. GIPR is expressed in various tissues, including the pancreas, gut, adipose tissue, vasculature, heart, and brain (see e.g. Hammoud et al. Nat Rev Endocrinol 2023; 18: 201 -216). Human GIPR comprises 466 amino acids and is encoded by a gene located on chromosome 19 (see e.g. Gremlich et al., Diabetes. 1995; 44:1202-8; and Volz et al., FEBS Lett. 1995, 373:23-29). Studies suggest that alternative mRNA splicing results in the production of GIPR variants with differing length (see e.g., Harada et al. Am J Physiol Endocrinol Metab. 2008. 294: E61-E68; and Marti-Solano et al. Nature. 2020, 587: 650-656).

[0009] GIPR knockout mice are resistant to high fat diet-induced weight gain and have improved insulin sensitivity and lipid profiles (see e.g. Yamada et al. Diabetes. 2006, 55:S86; and Miyawaki et al. Nature Med. 2002, 8:738-742). Recent data supports that heterozygous loss of function in GIPR results in lower BMI and obesity risk in humans (see e.g. Akbari et al. Science. 2021 , 373: 6550). Small molecules, peptides, and monoclonal antibodies with antagonist activity at GIPR have been shown to prevent weight gain and insulin resistance in preclinical obesity models (see e.g. Nakamura et al. Diabetes Metab Syndr Obes.

[0010] 2021 ,14:1095-1 105; Yang et al. Mol Metab. 2022, 66: 101638; and Killion et al. Sci. Transl. Med., 2018, 10:eaat3392). The combination of GIPR modulators with GLP-1 R agonists has been associated with superior weight loss (see e.g. Lu et al. Cell Rep Med. 2021 , 2(5):100263). Collectively, these links to obesity and metabolic diseases suggest that GIPR inhibition is a useful approach for therapeutic intervention, both as monotherapy and in combination with other agents including GLP-1 R agonists. Moreover, human epicardial adipose tissue - which plays a crucial role in the development and progression of coronary artery disease, atrial fibrillation, and heart failure - has been found to express GIPR genes and proteins. See e.g. Malavazos et al., European Journal of Preventive Cardiology (2023) 00, 1 -14.

[0011] There continues to be a need for alternative GIPR antagonists, for example, for developing new and / or improved pharmaceuticals (e.g., more effective, more selective, less toxic, improved patient compliance, and / or having improved biopharmaceutical properties such as physical stability; solubility; oral bioavailability; appropriate metabolic stability; clearance; half life) to treat or prevent GIPR-related conditions, diseases, or disorders, such as those described herein. The present invention is directed to these and other important ends.

[0012] SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION

[0013] In one embodiment (Embodiment A1), the present invention provides a compound of Formula I:

[0014] I or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein:

[0015] R1is H, halogen, -CN, -OR1C, Ci-8alkyl, C2-8 alkenyl, -C1.4 alkyl-(C3.6cycloalkyl), or C3.6cycloalkyl, wherein each of the C1-4 alkoxy, C1-4 haloalkoxy, C1-8 alkyl, C2-8 alkenyl, -C1-4 alkyl- (C3-6 cycloalkyl), or C3.6cycloalkyl is optionally substituted with 1 , 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6 substituents each independently selected from halogen, -OH, -CN, C1-4 alkyl, C1-4 haloalkyl, C1-4 alkoxy, and C1-4 haloalkoxy;

[0016] R1Cis C1-6 alkyl, Ci-6haloalkyl, C3-6 cycloalkyl, or -Ci_2alkyl-(C3-6 cycloalkyl), wherein each of the C3-6 cycloalkyl and -C1-2 alkyl-(C3-6 cycloalkyl) is optionally substituted with 1 , 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6 substituents each independently selected from halogen, C1-4 alkyl, C1-4 haloalkyl, C1-4 alkoxy, and C1-4 haloalkoxy; each of T1, T2, T3, and T4is independently CR4or N, provided that only 0, 1 , or 2 of T1, T2, T3, and T4can be N; each R4is independently H, halogen, -CN, C3-6 cycloalkyl, (C3-6 cycloalkyl)-Ci.2alkyl-, C1- 4 alkyl, C1-4 cyanoalkyl, C1-4 haloalkyl, C1-4 alkoxy, or C1-4 haloalkoxy; or R1and an adjacent R4, together with the two ring carbon atom to which they are attached, optionally form a fused 4- or 6- membered cycloalkyl ring, a fused 4- or 6- membered heterocycloalkyl ring, a fused 5- or 6- membered heteroaryl ring, or a fused 6-membered aryl ring, wherein each of the fused rings is optionally substituted with 1 , 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6 substituents each independently selected from halogen, -OH, -CN, C1-4 alkyl, C1-4 haloalkyl, C1-4 alkoxy, and C1-4 haloalkoxy; t1 , L1, and L2are

[0017] (a) t1 is 0 or 1 , L1is C(RL1)2or [C(RL1)2]2, and L2is NRN;

[0018] (b) t1 is 0 or 1 , L1is C(RL1)2, O, or NRN, and L2is C(RL2)2; or

[0019] (c) t1 is 1 , and -L1-L2- is -C(RL1)2-O-C(RL2)2-, -[C(RL1)2]3-, -C(RL1)2-N(RN)-C(RL2)2-, or a divalent C3-6 cycloalkyl ring optionally substituted with 1 , 2, 3, 4, or 5 substituents each independently selected from halogen, -OH, -CN, C1-4 alkyl, C1-4 haloalkyl, C1-4 alkoxy, C1-4 haloalkoxy; each of RL1and RL2is independently H, Ci-2alkyl, Ci-2haloalkyl, Ci-2alkoxy, or Ci-2haloalkoxy; or two RL1, together with the carbon atom to which they are attached, optionally form C3-6cycloalkyl or a 3- to 6-membered heterocycloalkyl, each of which is optionally substituted with 1 , 2, 3, or 4 substituents each independently selected from halogen, -OH, C1-4 alkyl, C1-4 haloalkyl, C1-4 alkoxy, and C1-4 haloalkoxy; or two RL2, together with the carbon atom to which they are attached, optionally form C3-6cycloalkyl or a 3- to 6-membered heterocycloalkyl, each of which is optionally substituted with 1 , 2, 3, or 4 substituents each independently selected from halogen, -OH, C1-4 alkyl, C1-4 haloalkyl, C1-4 alkoxy, and C1-4 haloalkoxy; or -C(RL1)2-C(RL2)2- together optionally forms C3-6 cycloalkyl or a 4- to 6-membered heterocycloalkyl, each of which is optionally substituted with 1 , 2, 3, or 4 substituents each independently selected from halogen, -OH, C1-4 alkyl, C1-4 haloalkyl, C1-4 alkoxy, and C1-4 haloalkoxy;

[0020] RNis H, C1-6 alkyl, C3-6 cycloalkyl, -C1-4 alkyl-(Cs-6 cycloalkyl); each R2is independently halogen, -OH, C1-4 alkyl, C1-4 haloalkyl, C1-4 alkoxy, C1-4 haloalkoxy, C3-4 cycloalkyl, or -Ci.4alkyl-(C3-6 cycloalkyl), wherein each of the C1-4 alkyl, C1-4 haloalkyl, C1-4 alkoxy, C1-4 haloalkoxy, C3-4 cycloalkyl, or -C1-4 alkyl-(C3-6 cycloalkyl) is optionally substituted with 1 , 2, or 3 substituents each independently selected from halogen, -OH, C1-4 alkyl, C1-4 haloalkyl, C1-4 alkoxy, and C1-4 haloalkoxy, provided that when a R2is attached to a ring-forming nitrogen atom of the ring having the variable n1 , then the R2is not halogen, -OH, an optionally substituted C1-4 alkoxy, or an optionally substituted C1-4 haloalkoxy; or two R2, when attached to a same ring-forming carbon atom of the ring having the variable n1 , together with the ring-forming carbon atom to which they are attached, optionally form C3-6 cycloalkyl or a 4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl, each of which is optionally substituted with 1 , 2, 3, or 4 substituents each independently selected from halogen, -OH, C1-4 alkyl, C1-4 haloalkyl, C1-4 alkoxy, and C1-4 haloalkoxy; or two R2, when attached to two adjacent ring-forming atoms of the ring having the variable n1 , together with the two ring-forming atoms to which they are attached, optionally form a fused C3-6 cycloalkyl group or a fused 4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl group, each of which is optionally substituted with 1 , 2, 3, or 4 substituents each independently selected from halogen, -OH, C1-4 alkyl, C1-4 haloalkyl, C1-4 alkoxy, and C1-4 haloalkoxy;

[0021] A1and n1 are each of T5, T6, T7, and T8is independently CR5or N, provided that only 0, 1 , or 2 of T5, T6, T7, and T8can be N; each R5is independently H, halogen, -CN, C3-6 cycloalkyl, (C3-6 cycloalkyl)-Ci.2alkyl-, Ci- 4 alkyl, C1-4 cyanoalkyl, C1-4 haloalkyl, C1-4 alkoxy, or C1-4 haloalkoxy; each of T9, T10, T11, and T12is independently CR6or N, provided that only 0, 1 , or 2 of T9, T10, T11, and T12can be N; each R6is independently H, halogen, -CN, C3-6 cycloalkyl, (C3-6 cycloalkyl)-Ci.2alkyl-, C1- 4 alkyl, C1-4 cyanoalkyl, C1-4 haloalkyl, C1-4 alkoxy, or C1-4 haloalkoxy; each of RLT1and RLT2is independently H, C1-2 alkyl, C1-2 haloalkyl, C3-6 cycloalkyl, or -Ci_2alkyl-(C3-6 cycloalkyl); or two RLT1, together with the carbon atom to which they are attached, optionally form C3-6 cycloalkyl or a 3- to 6-membered heterocycloalkyl, each of which is optionally substituted with 1 , 2, 3, or 4 substituents each independently selected from halogen, -OH, C1-4 alkyl, C1-4 haloalkyl, C1-4 alkoxy, and C1-4 haloalkoxy;

[0022] RAis -C(=O)-OH, -C(RL3)2-C(=O)-OH, -C(RL3)2-C(RL4)2-C(=O)-OH, -[C(RL3)2]3-C(=O)-OH, -O-C(RL3)2-C(=O)-OH, -O-C(RL3)2-C(RL4)2-C(=O)-OH, -O-[C(RL3)2]3-C(=O)-OH, OH, -C(=O)NH- C(RL3)2-C(=O)-OH, -C(=O)NH-C(RL3)2-C(RL4)2-C(=O)-OH, -C(=O)NH-[C(RL3)2]3-C(=O)-OH, - C(=O)-N(R7)(R8), -C(=O)-OR9, 1 / 7-tetrazol-5-yl, 3-hydroxyisoxazol-5-yl, 5(4H)-oxo-1 ,2,4- oxadiazol-3-yl-, 5(4 / 7)-oxo-1 ,2,4-thiadiazol-3-y I-, 2-thioxo-1 ,3,4-oxadiazol-5-yl-, 4 / 7-1 ,2,4-triazol- 3-yl-, 4-hydroxy-1 ,2,5-oxadiazol-3-yl, 1 -hydroxypyrazol-5-yl, 3-hydroxy-1 / 7-pyrazol-1 -yl-, a carboxylic acid bioisostere group, -S(=O)2NHCF3, or -C(=O)-NH-S(=O)2-R10° wherein R100is Ci-6alkyl or phenyl and where the phenyl is optionally substituted with 1 , 2, 3, or 4 substituents each independently selected from halogen, -OH, C1-4 alkyl, C1-4 haloalkyl, C1-4 alkoxy, and C1-4 haloalkoxy; each of RL3and RL4is independently H, C1-2 alkyl, C1-2 haloalkyl, C1-2 alkoxy, or C1-2 haloalkoxy; or two RL3, together with the carbon atom to which they are attached, optionally form C3. e cycloalkyl or a 3- to 6-membered heterocycloalkyl, each of which is optionally substituted with 1 , 2, 3, or 4 substituents each independently selected from halogen, -OH, C1-4 alkyl, C1-4 haloalkyl, C1-4 alkoxy, and C1-4 haloalkoxy; or two RL4, together with the carbon atom to which they are attached, optionally form C3. e cycloalkyl or a 3- to 6-membered heterocycloalkyl, each of which is optionally substituted with 1 , 2, 3, or 4 substituents each independently selected from halogen, -OH, C1-4 alkyl, C1-4 haloalkyl, C1-4 alkoxy, and C1-4 haloalkoxy; or -C(RL3)2-C(RL4)2- together optionally forms a divalent C3-6 cycloalkyl or a divalent 4- to 6-membered heterocycloalkyl, each of which is optionally substituted with 1 , 2, 3, or 4 substituents each independently selected from halogen, -OH, C1-4 alkyl, C1-4 haloalkyl, C1-4 alkoxy, and C1-4 haloalkoxy; each of R7and R8is independently H, Ci-6alkyl, C3-6 cycloalkyl, -C1-4 alkyl-(C3-6 cycloalkyl), phenyl, or -Ci-4 alkyl-phenyl, wherein each of the C1-6 alkyl, C3-6 cycloalkyl, -C1-4 alkyl-(C3-6 cycloalkyl), phenyl, or -C1-4 alkyl-phenyl is optionally substituted with 1 , 2, 3, 4, or 5 substituents each independently selected from halogen, -OH, -CN, C1-4 alkyl, C1-4 haloalkyl, C1-4 alkoxy, C1-4 haloalkoxy, C3-4 cycloalkyl, or -Ci_4alkyl-(C3-4 cycloalkyl); or R7and R8, together with the nitrogen atom to which they are attached, form a 4- to 8- membered heterocycloalkyl optionally substituted with 1 , 2, 3, 4, or 5 substituents each independently selected from halogen, -OH, -CN, Ci-4alkyl, Ci-4haloalkyl, Ci-4alkoxy, Ci-4haloalkoxy, C3.4cycloalkyl, or -Ci.4alkyl-(C3.4cycloalkyl), wherein each of the Ci-4alkyl, Ci.4haloalkyl, Ci.4alkoxy, Ci-4haloalkoxy, C3.4cycloalkyl, or -Ci.4alkyl-(C3.4cycloalkyl) is optionally substituted with 1 , 2, or 3 substituents each independently selected from halogen, -OH, Ci-4alkyl, Ci-4haloalkyl, Ci-4alkoxy, and Ci.4haloalkoxy;

[0023] R9is C1-6 alkyl, C3.6cycloalkyl, -Ci-4alkyl-(C3.6cycloalkyl), phenyl, or -Ci.4alkyl-phenyl, each of which is optionally substituted with 1 , 2, 3, 4, or 5 substituents each independently selected from halogen, -OH, -CN, Ci-4alkyl, Ci-4haloalkyl, Ci-4alkoxy, Ci-4haloalkoxy, C3.4cycloalkyl, or -Ci.4alkyl-(C3.4cycloalkyl); each Rcyis independently halogen, -OH, Ci-4alkyl, Ci-4haloalkyl, Ci-4hydroxylalkyl, Ci.4alkoxy, Ci-4haloalkoxy, C3.4cycloalkyl, or -Ci-4alkyl-(C3.4cycloalkyl); or two Rcy, together with a same ring carbon atom of the piperidine ring to which they are attached, form C3.6cycloalkyl that is optionally substituted with 1 , 2, 3, 4, or 5 substituents each independently selected from halogen, -OH, -CN, Ci-4alkyl, Ci.4haloalkyl, Ci-4alkoxy, Ci-4haloalkoxy, C3.4cycloalkyl, or -Ci.4alkyl-(C3.4cycloalkyl); or two Rcy, each of which is attached to a different ring-forming atom of the piperidine ring, are linked together form a single bond or a moiety of -CH2-, -CH2CH2-, -CH2CH2CH2-, or - CH2CH2CH2-, which moiety is optionally substituted with 1 , 2, 3, or 4 substituents each independently selected from halogen, -OH, -CN, Ci-4alkyl, Ci-4haloalkyl, Ci-4alkoxy, Ci-4haloalkoxy, C3.4cycloalkyl, or -Ci-4alkyl-(C3.4cycloalkyl); t2 is 0, 1 , 2, 3, or 4; and t3 is 0, 1 , 2, 3, or 4.

[0024] The present invention also provides a pharmaceutical composition containing the compound of Formula I or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt of the compound and a pharmaceutically acceptable excipient or carrier.

[0025] The present invention also provides a method for treating or preventing a GIPR-related condition, disease, or disorder in a patient (e.g., a mammal or a human), which method includes administering to the patient (e.g., the mammal or human) the compound of Formula I or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt of the compound; or a method for weight management of a human, which method includes administering to the human the compound of Formula I or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt of the compound.

[0026] The present invention also provides the compound of Formula I or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt of the compound for use in treating or preventing a GIPR-related condition, disease, or disorder, or for use in weight management. The present invention also provides use of the compound of Formula I or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt of the compound in treating or preventing a GIPR-related condition, disease, or disorder, or in weight management.

[0027] The present invention also provides use of the compound of Formula I or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt of the compound in manufacturing a medicament for treating or preventing a GIPR-related condition, disease, or disorder, for weight management.

[0028] The GIPR-related condition, disease, or disorder includes one selected from diabetes [e.g. Type 1 diabetes mellitus (T1 D), Type 2 diabetes mellitus (T2DM), including pre-d iabetes], idiopathic T1 D (Type 1 b), latent autoimmune diabetes in adults (LADA), early-onset T2DM (EOD), youth-onset atypical diabetes (YOAD), maturity onset diabetes of the young (MODY), malnutrition-related diabetes, gestational diabetes, hyperglycemia, insulin resistance, hepatic insulin resistance, impaired glucose tolerance, diabetic neuropathy, diabetic nephropathy, kidney disease [e.g., acute kidney disorder, tubular dysfunction, proinflammatory changes to the proximal tubules, or chronic kidney disease (CKD)], diabetic retinopathy, adipocyte dysfunction, visceral adipose deposition, sleep apnea [e.g. obstructive sleep apnea (OSA)], obesity (including hypothalamic obesity and monogenic obesity) and related comorbidities (e.g., osteoarthritis and urine incontinence), eating disorders (including binge eating syndrome, bulimia nervosa, and syndromic obesity such as Prader-Willi and Bardet-Biedl syndromes), weight gain such as weight gain caused by use of other agents (e.g., caused by use of steroids and / or antipsychotics, or caused by treatment of depression, or caused by use of agents on cognitive function), excessive sugar craving, dyslipidemia [including hyperlipidemia, hypertriglyceridemia, increased total cholesterol, high LDL (low-density lipoprotein) cholesterol, and low HDL (high-density lipoprotein) cholesterol], hyperinsulinemia, nonalcoholic fatty liver disease [NAFLD, including related diseases such as steatosis, nonalcoholic steatohepatitis (NASH), fibrosis, cirrhosis, and hepatocellular carcinoma], cardiovascular disease, atherosclerosis (including coronary artery disease), peripheral vascular disease, hypertension, endothelial dysfunction, impaired vascular compliance, heart failure [e.g. congestive heart failure, heart failure with preserved ejection fraction (HFpEF), heart failure with reduced ejection fraction (HFrEF)], myocardial infarction (e.g. necrosis and apoptosis), stroke, hemorrhagic stroke, ischemic stroke, traumatic brain injury, pulmonary hypertension, restenosis after angioplasty, intermittent claudication, post-prandial lipemia, metabolic acidosis, ketosis, arthritis, osteoporosis, osteoarthritis, Parkinson’s disease, left ventricular hypertrophy, peripheral arterial disease, macular degeneration, cataract, glomerulosclerosis, chronic renal failure, metabolic syndrome, syndrome X, premenstrual syndrome, angina pectoris, thrombosis, atherosclerosis, transient ischemic attacks, vascular restenosis, impaired glucose metabolism, conditions of impaired fasting plasma glucose, hyperuricemia, gout, erectile dysfunction, skin and connective tissue disorders, psoriasis, foot ulcerations, ulcerative colitis, hyper apo B lipoproteinemia, Alzheimer’s Disease, schizophrenia, impaired cognition, inflammatory bowel disease, short bowel syndrome, Crohn’s disease, colitis, irritable bowel syndrome, polycystic ovary syndrome (PCOS), and addiction (e.g., addition to alcohol, nicotine, and / or drug).

[0029] The present invention also provides a method for antagonizing a glucose-dependent insulinotropic polypeptide receptor (GIPR), which method includes contacting the GIPR with the compound of Formula I or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt of the compound.

[0030] It is to be understood that both the foregoing general description and the following detailed description are exemplary and explanatory only and are not restrictive of the invention, as claimed.

[0031] DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE INVENTION

[0032] The present invention may be understood more readily by reference to the following detailed description of exemplary embodiments of the invention and the examples included therein. It is to be understood that this invention is not limited to specific synthetic methods of making that may of course vary. It is to be also understood that the terminology used herein is for the purpose of describing specific embodiments only and is not intended to be limiting. A1 A compound of Formula I or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, as defined above.

[0033] In some further embodiments, A1is CH2, O, or NH, and n1 is 2.

[0034] In some further embodiments, A1is CH2or O, and n1 is 2.

[0035] In some further embodiments, A1is CH2, and n1 is 2.

[0036] In some other further embodiments, A1is CH2, and n1 is 1 .

[0037] In some further embodiments:

[0038] R1is H, halogen, -OR1C, -CN, Ci-8alkyl, C2.8alkenyl, (C3-6 cycloalkyl)-Ci-4 alkyl-, or C3-6 cycloalkyl, wherein each of the C1-4 alkoxy, C1-4 haloalkoxy, Ci-8alkyl, C2.8alkenyl, (C3-6 cycloalkyl)-Ci-4 alkyl-, or C3-6 cycloalkyl is optionally substituted with 1 , 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6 substituents each independently selected from halogen, -OH, -CN, C1-4 alkyl, C1-4 haloalkyl, C1-4 alkoxy, and C1-4 haloalkoxy; and each R4is independently H, halogen, -CN, C3-6 cycloalkyl, (C3-6 cycloalkyl)-Ci.2alkyl-, C1- 4 alkyl, C1-4 cyanoalkyl, C1.4 haloalkyl, C1-4 alkoxy, or C1-4 haloalkoxy; or R1and an adjacent R4, together with the two ring carbon atom to which they are attached, form a fused 4- or 6- membered cycloalkyl ring or a fused 4- or 6- membered heterocycloalkyl ring, wherein each of the fused 4- or 6- membered cycloalkyl ring or fused 4- or 6- membered heterocycloalkyl ring is optionally substituted with 1 , 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6 substituents each independently selected from halogen, -OH, -CN, C1-4 alkyl, C1.4 haloalkyl, C1-4 alkoxy, and C1-4 haloalkoxy.

[0039] In some further embodiments, R1and an adjacent R4, together with the two ring carbon atom to which they are attached, optionally form a fused 4- or 6- membered cycloalkyl ring that is optionally substituted with 1 , 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6 substituents each independently selected from halogen, -OH, -CN, C1-4 alkyl, C1-4 haloalkyl, C1-4 alkoxy, and C1-4 haloalkoxy. In some yet further embodiments, R1and an adjacent R4, together with the two ring carbon atom to which they are attached, optionally form a fused 5- or 6- membered cycloalkyl ring that is optionally substituted with 1 , 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6 substituents each independently selected from halogen, -OH, -CN, C1-4 alkyl, Ci-4haloalkyl, Ci-4alkoxy, and Ci-4haloalkoxy. In some still further embodiments, R1and an adjacent R4, together with the two ring carbon atom to which they are attached, optionally form a fused 6- membered cycloalkyl ring that is optionally substituted with 1 , 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6 substituents each independently selected from halogen, -OH, -CN, Ci-4alkyl, Ci-4haloalkyl, Ci-4alkoxy, and Ci.4haloalkoxy.

[0040] In some further embodiments, R1and an adjacent R4, together with the two ring carbon atom to which they are attached, optionally form a fused 4- or 6- membered heterocycloalkyl ring that is optionally substituted with 1 , 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6 substituents each independently selected from halogen, -OH, -CN, Ci-4alkyl, Ci-4haloalkyl, Ci-4alkoxy, and Ci-4haloalkoxy.

[0041] In some further embodiments, R1and an adjacent R4, together with the two ring carbon atom to which they are attached, optionally form a fused 5- or 6- membered heteroaryl ring that is optionally substituted with 1 , 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6 substituents each independently selected from halogen, -OH, -CN, Ci-4alkyl, Ci-4haloalkyl, Ci-4alkoxy, and Ci.4haloalkoxy. In some still further embodiments, R1and an adjacent R4, together with the two ring carbon atom to which they are attached, optionally form a fused 5- membered heteroaryl ring that is optionally substituted with 1 , 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6 substituents each independently selected from halogen, -OH, -CN, Ci-4alkyl, Ci-4haloalkyl, Ci-4alkoxy, and Ci-4haloalkoxy.

[0042] A2. A compound of embodiment A1 (including any further embodiment thereof), wherein the compound of Formula I is a compound of Formula la: or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.

[0043] A3. A compound of embodiment A1 (including any further embodiment thereof), wherein the compound of Formula I is a compound of Formula II: or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.

[0044] A4. A compound of embodiment A1 (including any further embodiment thereof), wherein the compound of Formula I is a compound of Formula Ila: or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.

[0045] A5. A compound of embodiment A1 (including any further embodiment thereof), wherein the compound of Formula I is a compound of Formula III:

[0046]

[0047] Ill or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof. A6. A compound of embodiment A1 (including any further embodiment thereof), wherein the compound of Formula I is a compound of Formula Illa:

[0048] Illa or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.

[0049] A7. A compound of embodiment A1 (including any further embodiment thereof), wherein the compound of Formula I is a compound of Formula IV:

[0050] or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof. A8. A compound of embodiment A1 (including any further embodiment thereof), wherein the compound of Formula I is a compound of Formula IVa: or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.

[0051] A9. A compound of embodiment A1 (including any further embodiment thereof), wherein the compound of Formula I is a compound of Formula V:

[0052] or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof. A10. A compound of embodiment A1 (including any further embodiment thereof), wherein the compound of Formula I is a compound of Formula Va:

[0053] Va or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.

[0054] A11 . A compound of embodiment A1 (including any further embodiment thereof), wherein the compound of Formula I is a compound of Formula VI:

[0055] or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof. A12. A compound of embodiment A1 (including any further embodiment thereof), wherein the compound of Formula I is a compound of Formula Via:

[0056] Via or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.

[0057] A13. A compound of embodiment A1 (including any further embodiment thereof), wherein the compound of Formula I is a compound of Formula VII:

[0058]

[0059] VII or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof. A14. A compound of embodiment A1 (including any further embodiment thereof), wherein the compound of Formula I is a compound of Formula Vila:

[0060] Vila or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.

[0061] A15. A compound of embodiment A1 (including any further embodiment thereof), wherein the compound of Formula I is a compound of Formula VIII: or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof. A16. A compound of embodiment A1 (including any further embodiment thereof), wherein the compound of Formula I is a compound of Formula Villa:

[0062] Villa or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.

[0063] A17. A compound of embodiment A1 (including any further embodiment thereof), wherein the compound of Formula I is a compound of Formula IX:

[0064] IX or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof. A18. A compound of embodiment A1 (including any further embodiment thereof), wherein the compound of Formula I is a compound of Formula IXa:

[0065] IXa or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.

[0066] A19. A compound of embodiment A1 (including any further embodiment thereof), wherein the compound is a compound of Formula X:

[0067] or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof. A20. A compound of embodiment A1 (including any further embodiment thereof), wherein the compound of Formula I is a compound of Formula Xa:

[0068] Xa or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.

[0069] A21. A compound of embodiment A1 (including any further embodiment thereof), wherein the compound of Formula I is a compound of Formula IX- 1 :

[0070] IX-1 or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof. A22. A compound of embodiment A1 (including any further embodiment thereof), wherein the compound of Formula I is a compound of Formula IXa-1 :

[0071] IXa-1 or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.

[0072] A23. A compound of embodiment A1 (including any further embodiment thereof), wherein the compound of Formula I is a compound of Formula IX-2:

[0073] IX-2 or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof. A24. A compound of embodiment A1 (including any further embodiment thereof), wherein the compound of Formula I is a compound of Formula Xla-2:

[0074] IXa-2 or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.

[0075] A25. A compound of embodiment A1 (including any further embodiment thereof), wherein the compound of Formula I is a compound of Formula IX-3:

[0076] or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof. A26. A compound of embodiment A1 (including any further embodiment thereof), wherein the compound of Formula I is a compound of Formula IXa-3:

[0077] IXa-3 or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.

[0078] A27. A compound of any one of embodiments A1 to A26 (including any further embodiment thereof), wherein R1is cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl, R1a, R1b, or R1c, wherein each of the cyclopropyl or cyclobutyl is optionally substituted with 1 , 2, 3, or 4 Rs; each R20is independently H, halogen, -OH, Ci-2alkyl, Ci-2haloalkyl, Ci-2alkoxy, or Ci.2haloalkoxy; each R21is independently H, Ci-2alkyl, or Ci-2haloalkyl;

[0079] R22is H, halogen, Ci-2alkyl, Ci-2hydroxylalkyl, Ci-2haloalkyl, Ci-2alkoxy, or Ci-2haloalkoxy; each R23is independently halogen, Ci-2alkyl, Ci-2hydroxylalkyl, Ci-2haloalkyl, Ci-2alkoxy, or Ci-2haloalkoxy; and each Rsis independently halogen, -OH, Ci-2alkyl, Ci-2hydroxylalkyl, Ci-2haloalkyl, Ci-2alkoxy, or Ci-2haloalkoxy.

[0080] A28. A compound of any one of embodiments A1 to A26 (including any further embodiment thereof), wherein R1is propan-2-yl, prop-1 -en-2-yl, or cyclopropyl.

[0081] A29. A compound of any one of embodiments A1 to A26 (including any further embodiment thereof), wherein R1is propan-2-yl.

[0082] A30. A compound of any one of embodiments A1 to A26 (including any further embodiment thereof), wherein R1is C1-4 haloalkyl.

[0083] In some further embodiments, R1is C1-4 fluoroalkyl.

[0084] In some further embodiments, R1is Ci-2haloalkyl.

[0085] In some further embodiments, R1is Ci-2fluoroalkyl. In some yet further embodiments, R1is R1is Ci-2fluoroalkyl. In some still further embodiments, CF3.

[0086] A31 . A compound of any one of embodiments A1 to A26 (including any further embodiment thereof), wherein R1is C1-4 haloalkoxy.

[0087] In some further embodiments, R1is C1-4 fluoroalkoxy.

[0088] In some further embodiments, R1is Ci-2haloalkoxy.

[0089] In some further embodiments, R1is Ci-2fluoroalkoxy. In some yet further embodiments, R1is R1is Ci-2fluoroalkoxy. In some still further embodiments, OCF3.

[0090] A31 . A compound of any one of embodiments A1 to A31 (including any further embodiment thereof), wherein each of T1, T2, T3, and T4is independently CR4.

[0091] A32. A compound of any one of embodiments A1 to A31 (including any further embodiment thereof), wherein one of T1, T2, T3, and T4is N, and the other three are each independently CR4.

[0092] A33. A compound of any one of embodiments A1 to A32 (including any further embodiment thereof), wherein each R4is independently H, halogen, or Ci-2alkyl. A34. A compound of any one of embodiments A1 to A33 (including any further embodiment thereof), wherein n1 is 1 and A1is CH2.

[0093] A35. A compound of any one of embodiments A1 to A33 (including any further embodiment thereof), wherein n1 is 2 and A1is CH2.

[0094] A36. A compound of any one of embodiments A1 to A35 (including any further embodiment thereof), wherein each R2is independently halogen, -OH, C1-4 alkyl, C1-4 hydroxylalkyl, C1-4 haloalkyl, C1-4 alkoxy, C1-4 haloalkoxy, C3-4 cycloalkyl, or -Ci-4 alkyl-(Cs-4 cycloalkyl); and t2 is 0, 1 , or 2.

[0095] A37. A compound of any one of embodiments A1 to A35 (including any further embodiment thereof), wherein t2 is 0.

[0096] A38. A compound of any one of embodiments A1 to A37 (including any further embodiment thereof), wherein each Rcyis independently halogen, -OH, C1-4 alkyl, C1-4 haloalkyl, C1-4 hydroxylalkyl, C1-4 alkoxy, C1-4 haloalkoxy, C3-4 cycloalkyl, or -C1-4 alkyl-(Cs-4 cycloalkyl); and t3 is 0, 1 , or 2.

[0097] A39. A compound of any one of embodiments A1 to A37 (including any further embodiment thereof), wherein t3 is 0.

[0098] A40. A compound of any one of embodiments A1 to A10, A13, A14, A17, A18, and A21 to A39 (including any further embodiment thereof), wherein each of T5, T6, T7, and T8is independently CR5.

[0099] A41 . A compound of any one of embodiments A1 to A10, A13, A14, A17, A18, and A21 to A39 (including any further embodiment thereof), wherein T5is N and each of T6, T7, and T8independently CR5.

[0100] A42. A compound of any one of embodiments A1 to A10, A13, A14, A17, A18, and A21 to A39 (including any further embodiment thereof), wherein T6is N and each of T5, T7, and T8independently CR5.

[0101] A43. A compound of any one of embodiments A1 to A10, A13, A14, A17, A18, and A21 to A42 (including any further embodiment thereof), wherein each R5is independently H, halogen, C1-4 alkyl, C1.4 haloalkyl, C1-4 alkoxy, or Ci.4 haloalkoxy. A44. A compound of any one of embodiments A1 to A8, A11 , A12, A15, A16, A19, A20, and A27 to A39 (including any further embodiment thereof), wherein each of T9, T10, T11, and T12is independently CR6.

[0102] A45. A compound of any one of embodiments A1 to A8, A11 , A12, A15, A16, A19, A20, and A27 to A39 (including any further embodiment thereof), wherein one of T9, T10, T11, and T12is N and the other three are each independently CR6.

[0103] A46. A compound of any one of embodiments A1 to A8, A1 1 , A12, A15, A16, A19, A20, A27 to A39, A44, and A45 (including any further embodiment thereof), wherein each R6is independently H, halogen, C1-4 alkyl, C1-4 haloalkyl, C1.4 alkoxy, or Ci_4haloalkoxy.

[0104] A47. A compound of any one of embodiments A1 to A46 (including any further embodiment thereof) wherein RAis -C(=O)-OH, -C(RL3)2-C(=O)-OH, or -C(RL3)2-C(RL4)2-C(=O)-OH. In some further embodiments, RAis -C(=O)-OH.

[0105] A48. A compound of any one of embodiments A1 to A46 (including any further embodiment thereof) wherein RAis -C(=O)-NH2.

[0106] A49. A compound selected from the group consisting of:

[0107] 6-{4-[(1-{[3-fluoro-4-(propan-2-yl)phenyl]carbamoyl}-D-prolyl)amino]piperidin-1-yl}-2- methylpyridine-3-carboxylic acid;

[0108] 3-fluoro-4-{4-[(1 -{[3-fluoro-4-(propan-2-yl)phenyl]carbamoyl}-D-prolyl)amino]piperidin-1 - yljbenzoic acid;

[0109] 4-{4-[(1-{[4-(trifluoromethyl)phenoxy]acetyl}-D-prolyl)amino]piperidin-1-yl}benzoic acid;

[0110] 4-{4-[(1-{[3-fluoro-4-(propan-2-yl)phenyl]carbamoyl}-D-prolyl)amino]piperidin-1-yl}-2- methylbenzoic acid;

[0111] 4-{4-[(1-{[3-methyl-4-(propan-2-yl)phenyl]carbamoyl}-D-prolyl)amino]piperidin-1 - yljbenzoic acid;

[0112] 3-methyl-4-{4-[(1 -{[4-(propan-2-yl)phenyl]carbamoyl}-D-prolyl)amino]piperidin-1 - yljbenzoic acid;

[0113] 2-methyl-6-{4-[(1 -{[3-methyl-4-(propan-2-yl)phenyl]carbamoyl}-D-prolyl)amino]piperidin- 1 -yl}pyridine-3-carboxylic acid;

[0114] 2-methyl-4-{4-[(1 -{[3-methyl-4-(propan-2-yl)phenyl]carbamoyl}-D-prolyl)amino]piperidin- 1 -yl}benzoic acid;

[0115] 2-methyl-4-{4-[(1 -{[4-(trifluoromethoxy)phenyl]carbamoyl}-D-prolyl)amino]piperidin-1- yljbenzoic acid; and 3-methyl-4-{4-[(1 -{[4-(trifluoromethoxy)phenyl]carbamoyl}-D-prolyl)amino]piperidin-1 - yljbenzoic acid, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.

[0116] B1 . A pharmaceutical composition comprising a compound of any one of embodiments A1 to A49 including the further embodiments described herein and a pharmaceutically acceptable excipient.

[0117] C1 . A method for treating or preventing a condition, disease, or disorder in a patient comprising administering to the patient a compound of any one of Embodiments A1 to A49 including the further embodiments described herein, wherein the condition, disease, or disorder is selected from the group consisting of diabetes [e.g. Type 1 diabetes mellitus (T1 D), Type 2 diabetes mellitus (T2DM), including pre-diabetes], idiopathic T1 D (Type 1 b), latent autoimmune diabetes in adults (LADA), early-onset T2DM (EOD), youth-onset atypical diabetes (YOAD), maturity onset diabetes of the young (MODY), malnutrition-related diabetes, gestational diabetes, hyperglycemia, insulin resistance, hepatic insulin resistance, impaired glucose tolerance, diabetic neuropathy, diabetic nephropathy, kidney disease [e.g., acute kidney disorder, tubular dysfunction, proinflammatory changes to the proximal tubules, or chronic kidney disease (CKD)], diabetic retinopathy, adipocyte dysfunction, visceral adipose deposition, sleep apnea [e.g. obstructive sleep apnea (OSA)], obesity (including hypothalamic obesity and monogenic obesity) and related comorbidities (e.g., osteoarthritis and urine incontinence), eating disorders (including binge eating syndrome, bulimia nervosa, and syndromic obesity such as Prader-Willi and Bardet-Biedl syndromes), weight gain such as weight gain caused by use of other agents (e.g., caused by use of steroids and / or antipsychotics, or caused by treatment of depression, or caused by use of agents on cognitive function), overweight, excessive sugar craving, dyslipidemia [including hyperlipidemia, hypertriglyceridemia, increased total cholesterol, high LDL (low-density lipoprotein) cholesterol, and low HDL (high-density lipoprotein) cholesterol], hyperinsulinemia, nonalcoholic fatty liver disease [NAFLD, including related diseases such as steatosis, nonalcoholic steatohepatitis (NASH), fibrosis, cirrhosis, and hepatocellular carcinoma], cardiovascular disease, atherosclerosis (including coronary artery disease), peripheral vascular disease, hypertension, endothelial dysfunction, impaired vascular compliance, heart failure [e.g. congestive heart failure, heart failure with preserved ejection fraction (HFpEF), heart failure with reduced ejection fraction (HfrEF)], myocardial infarction (e.g. necrosis and apoptosis), stroke, hemorrhagic stroke, ischemic stroke, traumatic brain injury, pulmonary hypertension, restenosis after angioplasty, intermittent claudication, post-prandial lipemia, metabolic acidosis, ketosis, arthritis, osteoporosis, osteoarthritis, Parkinson’s disease, left ventricular hypertrophy, peripheral arterial disease (PAD), macular degeneration, cataract, glomerulosclerosis, chronic renal failure, metabolic syndrome, syndrome X, premenstrual syndrome, angina pectoris, thrombosis, atherosclerosis, transient ischemic attacks, vascular restenosis, impaired glucose metabolism, conditions of impaired fasting plasma glucose, hyperuricemia, gout, erectile dysfunction, skin and connective tissue disorders, psoriasis, foot ulcerations, ulcerative colitis, hyper apo B lipoproteinemia, Alzheimer’s Disease, schizophrenia, impaired cognition, inflammatory bowel disease, short bowel syndrome, Crohn’s disease, colitis, irritable bowel syndrome, polycystic ovary syndrome (PCOS), and addiction (e.g., addition to alcohol, nicotine, and / or drug); or a method for weight management (e.g. chronic weight management) of a human comprising administering to the human a compound of any one of embodiments A1 to A49 including the further embodiments described herein.

[0118] As used herein, treating diabetes (e.g. T2DM) in a diabetic patient (e.g. a patient with T2DM) includes, among other things, improving glycemic control.

[0119] C2. A method of embodiment C1 , wherein the condition, disease, or disorder is selected from the group consisting of obesity, weight gain, T2DM, Heart Failure (e.g. HFpEF and HFrEF); CKD; NAFLD, NASH, atherosclerosis, PAD, obstructive sleep apnea, diabetic retinopathy, and diabetic neuropathy.

[0120] C3. A method of embodiment C1 , wherein the method is for preventing weight gain. C4. A method of embodiment C1 , wherein the method is for preventing obesity. C5. A method of embodiment C1 , wherein the method is for treating obesity.

[0121] C6. A method of embodiment C1 , wherein the method is for weight management, for example chronic weight management, of a human. In some further embodiments, the human is obese or overweight when the weight management (e.g. chronic weight management) is initiated; and in such a situation, the weight management (e.g. chronic weight management) is also a method for treating obesity or overweight. In some further embodiments, the human is obese when the weight management (e.g. chronic weight management) treatment is initiated; and in such a situation, the weight management (e.g. chronic weight management) is also a method for treating obesity.

[0122] D1 . Use of a compound of any one of embodiments A1 to A49 including the further embodiments described herein for treating or preventing a condition, disease, or disorder, or use of a compound in manufacturing a medicament for treating or preventing a condition, disease, or disorder, wherein the condition, disease, or disorder is selected from the group consisting of diabetes [e.g. Type 1 diabetes mellitus (T1 D), Type 2 diabetes mellitus (T2DM), including pre-d iabetes], idiopathic T1 D (Type 1 b), latent autoimmune diabetes in adults (LADA), early-onset T2DM (EOD), youth-onset atypical diabetes (YOAD), maturity onset diabetes of the young (MODY), malnutrition-related diabetes, gestational diabetes, hyperglycemia, insulin resistance, hepatic insulin resistance, impaired glucose tolerance, diabetic neuropathy, diabetic nephropathy, kidney disease [e.g., acute kidney disorder, tubular dysfunction, proinflammatory changes to the proximal tubules, or chronic kidney disease (CKD)], diabetic retinopathy, adipocyte dysfunction, visceral adipose deposition, sleep apnea [e.g. obstructive sleep apnea (OSA)], obesity (including hypothalamic obesity and monogenic obesity) and related comorbidities (e.g., osteoarthritis and urine incontinence), eating disorders (including binge eating syndrome, bulimia nervosa, and syndromic obesity such as Prader-Willi and Bardet-Biedl syndromes), weight gain such as weight gain caused by use of other agents (e.g., caused by use of steroids and / or antipsychotics, or caused by treatment of depression, or caused by use of agents on cognitive function), overweight, excessive sugar craving, dyslipidemia [including hyperlipidemia, hypertriglyceridemia, increased total cholesterol, high LDL (low-density lipoprotein) cholesterol, and low HDL (high-density lipoprotein) cholesterol], hyperinsulinemia, nonalcoholic fatty liver disease [NAFLD, including related diseases such as steatosis, nonalcoholic steatohepatitis (NASH), fibrosis, cirrhosis, and hepatocellular carcinoma], cardiovascular disease, atherosclerosis (including coronary artery disease), peripheral vascular disease, hypertension, endothelial dysfunction, impaired vascular compliance, heart failure [e.g. congestive heart failure, heart failure with preserved ejection fraction (HFpEF), heart failure with reduced ejection fraction (HFrEF)], myocardial infarction (e.g. necrosis and apoptosis), stroke, hemorrhagic stroke, ischemic stroke, traumatic brain injury, pulmonary hypertension, restenosis after angioplasty, intermittent claudication, post-prandial lipemia, metabolic acidosis, ketosis, arthritis, osteoporosis, osteoarthritis, Parkinson’s disease, left ventricular hypertrophy, peripheral arterial disease (PAD), macular degeneration, cataract, glomerulosclerosis, chronic renal failure, metabolic syndrome, syndrome X, premenstrual syndrome, angina pectoris, thrombosis, atherosclerosis, transient ischemic attacks, vascular restenosis, impaired glucose metabolism, conditions of impaired fasting plasma glucose, hyperuricemia, gout, erectile dysfunction, skin and connective tissue disorders, psoriasis, foot ulcerations, ulcerative colitis, hyper apo B lipoproteinemia, Alzheimer’s Disease, schizophrenia, impaired cognition, inflammatory bowel disease, short bowel syndrome, Crohn’s disease, colitis, irritable bowel syndrome, polycystic ovary syndrome (PCOS), and addiction (e.g., addition to alcohol, nicotine, and / or drug); or use of a compound of any one of embodiments A1 to A49 including the further embodiments described herein for weight management (e.g. chronic weight management); or use of a compound of any one of embodiments A1 to A49 including the further embodiments described herein in manufacturing a medicament for weight management (e.g. chronic weight management);.

[0123] D2. A use of embodiment D1 , wherein the condition, disease, or disorder is selected from the group consisting of obesity, weight gain, T2DM, Heart Failure (e.g. HFpEF and HFrEF); CKD; NAFLD, NASH, atherosclerosis, PAD, obstructive sleep apnea, diabetic retinopathy, and diabetic neuropathy.

[0124] D3. A use of embodiment D1 , wherein the use of a compound of any one of embodiments A1 to A49 including the further embodiments described herein is for preventing weight gain. D4. A use of embodiment D1 , wherein the use of a compound of any one of embodiments A1 to A49 including the further embodiments described herein is in manufacturing a medicament for preventing weight gain. D5. A use of embodiment D1 , wherein the use of a compound of any one of embodiments A1 to A49 including the further embodiments described herein is for treating obesity.

[0125] D6. A use of embodiment D1 , wherein the use of a compound of any one of embodiments A1 to A49 including the further embodiments described herein is in manufacturing a medicament for obesity.

[0126] D7. A use of embodiment D1 , wherein the use of a compound of any one of embodiments A1 to A49 including the further embodiments described herein is in manufacturing a medicament for weight management, for example chronic weight management of a human. In some further embodiments, the human is obese or overweight when the weight management (e.g. chronic weight management) is initiated; and in such a situation, the weight management is also a method for treating obesity or overweight. In some further embodiments, the human is obese when the weight management (e.g. chronic weight management) treatment is initiated; and in such a situation, the weight management is also a method for treating obesity.

[0127] E1 . A compound of any one of embodiments A1 to A49 including the further embodiments described herein for use in a method for treating or preventing a condition, disease, or disorder in a patient, wherein the condition, disease, or disorder is selected from the group consisting of diabetes [e.g. Type 1 diabetes mellitus (T1 D), Type 2 diabetes mellitus (T2DM), including prediabetes], idiopathic T1 D (Type 1 b), latent autoimmune diabetes in adults (LADA), early-onset T2DM (EOD), youth-onset atypical diabetes (YOAD), maturity onset diabetes of the young (MODY), malnutrition-related diabetes, gestational diabetes, hyperglycemia, insulin resistance, hepatic insulin resistance, impaired glucose tolerance, diabetic neuropathy, diabetic nephropathy, kidney disease [e.g., acute kidney disorder, tubular dysfunction, proinflammatory changes to the proximal tubules, or chronic kidney disease (CKD)], diabetic retinopathy, adipocyte dysfunction, visceral adipose deposition, sleep apnea [e.g. obstructive sleep apnea (OSA)], obesity (including hypothalamic obesity and monogenic obesity) and related comorbidities (e.g., osteoarthritis and urine incontinence), eating disorders (including binge eating syndrome, bulimia nervosa, and syndromic obesity such as Prader-Willi and Bardet-Biedl syndromes), weight gain such as weight gain caused by use of other agents (e.g., caused by use of steroids and / or antipsychotics, or caused by treatment of depression, or caused by use of agents on cognitive function), overweight, excessive sugar craving, dyslipidemia [including hyperlipidemia, hypertriglyceridemia, increased total cholesterol, high LDL (low-density lipoprotein) cholesterol, and low HDL (high-density lipoprotein) cholesterol], hyperinsulinemia, nonalcoholic fatty liver disease [NAFLD, including related diseases such as steatosis, nonalcoholic steatohepatitis (NASH), fibrosis, cirrhosis, and hepatocellular carcinoma], cardiovascular disease, atherosclerosis (including coronary artery disease), peripheral vascular disease, hypertension, endothelial dysfunction, impaired vascular compliance, heart failure [e.g. congestive heart failure, heart failure with preserved ejection fraction (HFpEF), heart failure with reduced ejection fraction (HFrEF)], myocardial infarction (e.g. necrosis and apoptosis), stroke, hemorrhagic stroke, ischemic stroke, traumatic brain injury, pulmonary hypertension, restenosis after angioplasty, intermittent claudication, post-prandial lipemia, metabolic acidosis, ketosis, arthritis, osteoporosis, osteoarthritis, Parkinson’s disease, left ventricular hypertrophy, peripheral arterial disease (PAD), macular degeneration, cataract, glomerulosclerosis, chronic renal failure, metabolic syndrome, syndrome X, premenstrual syndrome, angina pectoris, thrombosis, atherosclerosis, transient ischemic attacks, vascular restenosis, impaired glucose metabolism, conditions of impaired fasting plasma glucose, hyperuricemia, gout, erectile dysfunction, skin and connective tissue disorders, psoriasis, foot ulcerations, ulcerative colitis, hyper apo B lipoproteinemia, Alzheimer’s Disease, schizophrenia, impaired cognition, inflammatory bowel disease, short bowel syndrome, Crohn’s disease, colitis, irritable bowel syndrome, polycystic ovary syndrome (PCOS), and addiction (e.g., addition to alcohol, nicotine, and / or drug); or is a compound of any one of embodiments A1 to A49 including the further embodiments described herein for use in a method for weight management (e.g. chronic weight management).

[0128] E2. A compound for use of embodiment E1 , wherein the condition, disease, or disorder is selected from the group consisting of obesity, weight gain, T2DM, Heart Failure (e.g. HFpEF and HFrEF); CKD; NAFLD, NASH, atherosclerosis, PAD, obstructive sleep apnea, diabetic retinopathy, and diabetic neuropathy.

[0129] E3. A compound for use of embodiment E1 , wherein a compound of any one of embodiments A1 to A49 including the further embodiments described herein is for use in a method for preventing weight gain.

[0130] E4. A compound for use of embodiment E1 , wherein a compound of any one of Embodiments A1 to A49 including the further embodiments described herein is for use in a method for treating obesity.

[0131] E5. A compound for use of embodiment E1 , wherein a compound of any one of Embodiments A1 to A49 including the further embodiments described herein is for use in a method for weight management (e.g. chronic weight management). In some further embodiments, the human is obese or overweight when the weight management (e.g. chronic weight management) is initiated; and in such a situation, the weight management is also a method for treating obesity or overweight. In some further embodiments, the human is obese when the weight management (e.g. chronic weight management) treatment is initiated; and in such a situation, the weight management is also a method for treating obesity.

[0132] F1 . A method for modulating (e.g. antagonizing) a GIPR (either in vitro or in vivo), comprising contacting (including incubating) the GIPR with a compound of any one of embodiments A1 to A49 including the further embodiments described herein. F2. A method of embodiment F1 , wherein said modulating is antagonizing.

[0133] It is to be understood that this invention is not limited to specific synthetic methods of preparation described in the schemes herein. It is also to be understood that the terminology used herein is for the purpose of describing particular embodiments only and is not intended to be limiting. In this specification and in the claims that follow, reference will be made to a number of terms that shall be defined to have the following meanings:

[0134] As used herein in the specification, "a" or "an" may mean one or more. As used herein in the claim(s), when used in conjunction with the word "comprising", the words "a" or "an" may mean one or more than one. As used herein "another" may mean at least a second or more.

[0135] The term “about” refers to a relative term denoting an approximation of plus or minus 10% of the nominal value to which it refers, in one embodiment, to plus or minus 5%, in another embodiment, to plus or minus 2%. For the field of this disclosure, this level of approximation is appropriate unless the value is specifically stated to require a tighter range.

[0136] “Compound” when used herein includes any pharmaceutically acceptable derivative or variation, including conformational isomers (e.g., cis and trans isomers) and all optical isomers (e.g., enantiomers and diastereomers), racemic, diastereomeric and other mixtures of such isomers, as well as solvates, hydrates, isomorphs, polymorphs, tautomers, esters, salt forms, and prodrugs.

[0137] As used herein, a wavy line," denotes a point of attachment of a substituent to another group.

[0138] When a bond to a substituent is shown to cross a bond connecting two atoms in a ring, then such substituent may be bonded to any of the ring-forming atoms in the ring that are substitutable (i.e., bonded to one or more hydrogen atoms). For example, as shown in Formula a-101 below, an R2may be bonded to any one of the substitutable ring-forming atoms of the ring having the variable n1 , each of which bears a hydrogen atom (for example, a ring-forming carbon atom of CH2or a ring-forming nitrogen atom when A1is NH). For another example, as shown in Formula a-101 below, an Rcymay be bonded to any ring-forming atom that is substitutable in the piperidine ring. a-101

[0139] The term “alkyl” means an acyclic, saturated aliphatic hydrocarbon group which may be straight / linear or branched. Examples of such groups include, but are not limited to, methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, isopropyl, butyl, sec-butyl, isobutyl and te / Y-butyl . The carbon atom content of alkyl and various other hydrocarbon-containing moieties is indicated by a prefix designating a lower and upper number of carbon atoms in the moiety, that is, the prefix CH indicates a moiety of the integer "i" to the integer "j" carbon atoms, inclusive. Thus, for example, Ci-s alkyl refers to alkyl of one to eight carbon atoms, inclusive; for another example, Ci-6alkyl refers to alkyl of one to six carbon atoms, inclusive; for yet another example, C1-4 alkyl refers to alkyl of one to four carbon atoms, inclusive. Representative examples of C1-4 alkyl include methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, isopropyl, n-butyl, sec-butyl, isobutyl, and te / Y-butyl. For another example, C1-2 alkyl refers to alkyl of one to two carbon atoms, inclusive (i.e., methyl or ethyl). The alkyl group optionally can be substituted by 1 or more (e.g., 1 to 5) suitable substituents, when so specified.

[0140] At various places in the present specification, substituents of compounds of the invention are disclosed in groups or in ranges. It is specifically intended that the invention include each and every individual sub-combination of the members of such groups and ranges. For example, the term “C1-4 alkyl” is specifically intended to include Ci alkyl (methyl), C2alkyl (ethyl), C3alkyl, and C4alkyl. For another example, the term “4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl” is specifically intended to include any 4-, 5-, 6-, or 7-membered heterocycloalkyl group. For yet another example, the term "C3-6 cycloalkyl” is specifically intended to include any saturated or unsaturated, non-aromatic, monocyclic or polycyclic (such as bicyclic) hydrocarbon rings of 3, 4, 5, or 6 ring-forming carbon atoms.

[0141] As used herein, the term “n-membered”, where n is an integer, typically describes the number of ring-forming atoms in a moiety where the number of ring-forming atoms is n. For example, piperidinyl is an example of a 6-membered heterocycloalkyl ring and pyrrolindinyl is an example of a 5-membered heterocycloalkyl group.

[0142] As used herein, the term “alkoxy” or “alkyloxy” refers to an -O-alkyl group. For example, the term “C1-4 alkoxy” or “C1-4 alkyloxy” refers to an -O-(Ci-4 alkyl) group; For another example, the term “C1-2 alkoxy” or “C1-2 alkyloxy” refers to an -O-(Ci.2alkyl) group. Examples of alkoxy include methoxy, ethoxy, propoxy (e.g., n-propoxy and isopropoxy), tert-butoxy, and the like. The alkoxy or alkyloxy group optionally can be substituted by 1 or more (e.g., 1 to 5) suitable substituents when so specified.

[0143] The term "halo" or "halogen" as used herein, means -F, -Cl, -Br, or -I.

[0144] As used herein, the term “haloalkyl” refers to an alkyl group having one or more halogen substituents (up to perhaloalkyl, i.e., every hydrogen atom of the alkyl group has been replaced by a halogen atom). For example, the term “C1-4 haloalkyl” refers to a C1-4 alkyl group having one or more halogen substituents (up to perhaloalkyl, i.e., every hydrogen atom of the alkyl group has been replaced by a halogen atom); and the term “Ci-2haloalkyl” refers to a Ci-2alkyl group (i.e., methyl or ethyl) having one or more halogen substituents (up to perhaloalkyl, i.e., every hydrogen atom of the alkyl group has been replaced by a halogen atom). Examples of haloalkyl groups include -CF3, -CHF2, -CH2F, -CH2CF3, -C2F5, -CH2CI and the like.

[0145] “Fluoroalkyl” as used herein means an alkyl as defined herein substituted with one or more fluoro (-F) substituents (up to perfluoroalkyl, i.e., every hydrogen atom of the alkyl group has been replaced by a fluorine atom). The term “C1-4 fluoroalkyl” refers to a C1-4 alkyl group (e.g., methyl or ethyl) having one or more fluorine substituents (up to perfluoroalkyl, i.e., every hydrogen atom of the alkyl group has been replaced by a fluorine atom); the term “Ci-2fluoroalkyl” refers to a Ci-2alkyl group (i.e., methyl or ethyl) having one or more fluorine substituents (up to perfluoroalkyl, i.e., every hydrogen atom of the alkyl group has been replaced by a fluorine atom); and the term “Ci fluoroalkyl” refers to methyl having 1 , 2, or 3 fluorine substituents. Examples of Ci fluoroalkyl include fluoromethyl, difluoromethyl and trifluoromethyl; some examples of C2fluoroalkyl include 1 -fluoroethyl, 2-fluoroethyl, 2,2- difluoroethyl, 1 ,2-difluoroethyl, 2,2,2-trifluoroethyl, 1 ,1 ,2-trifluoroethyl, and the like.

[0146] As used here, the term “haloalkoxy” refers to an -O-haloalkyl group. For example, the term “C1-4 haloalkoxy” refers to an -O-(Ci-4 haloalkyl) group; and the term “Ci-2haloalkoxy” refers to an -O-(Ci.2haloalkyl) group. For yet another example, the term “Ci haloalkoxy” refers to a methoxy group having one, two, or three halogen substituents. An example of haloalkoxy is -OCF3 or -OCHF2.

[0147] As used here, the term “fluoroalkoxy” refers to an -O-fluoroalkyl group. For example, the term “C1-4 fluoroalkoxy” refers to an -O-(Ci.4fluoroalkyl) group; the term “Ci-2fluoroalkoxy” refers to an -O-(Ci.2fluoroalkyl) group; and the term “Ci fluoroalkoxy” refers to an -O-(Ci fluoroalkyl) group. Examples of Ci fluoroalkoxy include -O-CH2F, -O-CHF2, and -O-CF3. Some examples of C2fluoroalkoxy include -O-CH2CHF2, -O-CH2-CHF2, -O-CH2CFs, -O-CF2CHs, and - O-CF2CF3.

[0148] As used herein, the term “hydroxylalkyl” or “hydroxyalkyl” refers to an alkyl group having one or more (e.g., 1 , 2, or 3) OH substituents. The term “C1.4 hydroxylalkyl” or “C1-4 hydroxyalkyl” refers to a C1-4 alkyl group having one or more (e.g., 1 , 2, or 3) OH substituents; and the term “Ci-2hydroxylalkyl” or “Ci-2hydroxyalkyl” refers to a Ci-2alkyl group having one or more (e.g., 1 , 2, or 3) OH substituents. An example of hydroxylalkyl is -CH2OH or - CH2CH2OH.

[0149] As used herein, the term “cyanoalkyl” refers to an alkyl group having one or more (e.g., 1 , 2, or 3) -CN (i.e. -C=N or cyano) substituents. For example, The term “C1.4 cyanoalkyl” refers to a C1-4 alkyl group having one or more (e.g., 1 , 2, or 3) -CN substituents. An example of cyanoalkyl is -CH2-CN or -CH2CH2-CN.

[0150] As used herein, the term "alkenyl" refers to aliphatic hydrocarbons having at least one carbon-carbon double bond, including straight chains and branched chains having at least one carbon-carbon double bond. In some embodiments, the alkenyl group has 2 to 20 carbon atoms, 2 to 10 carbon atoms, 2 to 6 carbon atoms, 3 to 6 carbon atoms, or 2 to 4 carbon atoms. For example, as used herein, the term "C2.8 alkenyl" refers to straight or branched chain unsaturated radicals (having at least one carbon-carbon double bond) of 2 to 8 carbon atoms; the term "C3-6 alkenyl" refers to straight or branched chain unsaturated radicals (having at least one carbon-carbon double bond) of 3 to 6 carbon atoms; and the term "C3-4 alkenyl" refers to straight or branched chain unsaturated radicals (having at least one carbon-carbon double bond) of 3 to 4 carbon atoms. Examples of "C3-6 alkenyl" include, but are not limited to, prop-2-en-1 -yl, prop-1 -en-2-yl, but-2-en-1 -yl, but-2-en-2-yl, 2-methylbut-2-en-1 - yl, and the like. An alkenyl group optionally can be substituted by one or more (e.g. 1 to 5) suitable substituents. When the compounds of Formula I contain an alkenyl group, the alkenyl group may exist as the pure E form, the pure Z form, or any mixture thereof when applicable.

[0151] As used herein, the term "cycloalkyl” refers to saturated or unsaturated, non-aromatic, monocyclic or polycyclic (such as bicyclic) hydrocarbon rings (e.g., monocyclics such as cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl, cyclohexyl, cycloheptyl, cyclooctyl, cyclononyl, or bicyclics including spiro, fused, or bridged systems (such as bicyclo[1.1.1]pentanyl, bicyclo[2.2.1 ]heptanyl, bicyclo[3.2.1]octanyl or bicyclo[5.2.0]nonanyl, decahydronaphthalenyl, etc.). The cycloalkyl group has 3 to 15 (e.g., 3 to 14, 3 to 10, 3 to 6, 3 to 4, or 4 to 6) carbon atoms. In some embodiments the cycloalkyl may optionally contain one, two, or more non-cumulative non- aromatic double or triple bonds and / or one to three oxo groups. In some embodiments, the bicycloalkyl group has 6 to 14 carbon atoms. The term "C3-6 cycloalkyl" or “3- to 6-membered cyclcoalkyl” as used herein, means a saturated or unsaturated (but non-aromatic) cyclic hydrocarbon group containing from 3 to 6 carbons. The term "C4-6 cycloalkyl" or “4- to 6- membered cyclcoalkyl” as used herein, means a saturated or unsaturated (but non-aromatic) cyclic hydrocarbon group containing from 4 to 6 carbons. The term "C3-4 cycloalkyl" as used herein, means a saturated cyclic hydrocarbon group containing from 3 to 4 carbons. Examples of C3-4 cycloalkyl include cyclopropyl and cyclobutyl. Also included in the definition of cycloalkyl are moieties that have one or more aromatic rings (including aryl and heteroaryl) fused to the cycloalkyl ring, for example, benzo or pyridinyl derivatives of cyclopentane (a 5-membered cycloalkyl), cyclopentene, cyclohexane (a 6-membered cycloalkyl), and the like, for example, 2,3-dihydro-1 H-indenyl, 6,7-dihydro-5 / 7-cyclopenta[b]pyridinyl, 5,6,7,8-tetrahydroquinolinyl, or 1 5,6,7,8-tetrahydroisoquinolinyl, each of which includes a 5-membered or 6-membered cycloalkyl moiety that is fused to a benzene rign or heteroaryl ring (i.e. the pyridinyl ring). The cycloalkyl such as C3-4 cycloalkyl group optionally can be substituted by 1 or more (e.g., 1 to 5) suitable substituents when so specified.

[0152] The term " -C1-4 alkyl-Cs-e cycloalkyl" or"Cs-6 cycloalkyl-Ci.4 alkyl-" as used herein, means a C3-6 cycloalkyl as defined herein, appended to the parent molecular moiety through a C3-4 alkyl group, as defined herein. The term " C1-4 alkyl-C3-4 cycloalkyl" or "C3-4 cycloalkyl-Ci.4alkyl-" as used herein, means a C3-4 cycloalkyl as defined herein, appended to the parent molecular moiety through a C3-4 alkyl group, as defined herein. Some examples of C3-4 cycloalkyl-Ci.4 alkyl- include cyclopropylmethyl, 2-cyclopropylethyl, 2-cyclopropylpropyl, 3- cyclopropylpropyl, cyclobutylmethyl, 2-cyclobutylethyl, 2-cyclobutylpropyl, and 3- cyclobutylpropyl.

[0153] The term "C3-6 cycloalkyl-Ci.2alkyl-" or "-C1.2 alkyl-C3-6 cycloalkyl" as used herein, means a C3-6 cycloalkyl as defined herein, appended to the parent molecular moiety through a C1-2 alkyl group, as defined herein. The term "C3-4 cycloalkyl-Ci.2alkyl-" or "-C1.2 alkyl-C3-4 cycloalkyl" as used herein, means a C3-4 cycloalkyl as defined herein, appended to the parent molecular moiety through a Ci-2alkyl group, as defined herein.

[0154] As used herein, the term “heterocycloalkyl” refers to a monocyclic or polycyclic [including 2 or more rings that are fused together, including spiro, fused, or bridged systems, for example, a bicyclic ring system], saturated or unsaturated, non-aromatic 4- to 15- membered ring system (such as a 4- to 14-membered ring system, 4- to 12-membered ring system, 5- to 10-membered ring system, 4- to 7-membered ring system, 4- to 6-membered ring system, or 5- to 6-membered ring system), including 1 to 14 ring-forming carbon atoms and 1 to 10 ring-forming heteroatoms each independently selected from O, S and N (and optionally P or B when present). The heterocycloalkyl group can also optionally contain one or more oxo (i.e., =O) or thiono (i.e., =S) groups. For example, the term "4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl” refers to a monocyclic or polycyclic, saturated or unsaturated, non-aromatic 4- to 7-membered ring system that comprises one or more ring-forming heteroatoms each independently selected from O, S and N. For another example, the term "4- or 6-membered heterocycloalkyl” refers to a monocyclic or polycyclic, saturated or unsaturated, non-aromatic 4- or 6-membered ring system that comprises one or more ring-forming heteroatoms each independently selected from O, S and N. Also included in the definition of heterocycloalkyl are moieties that have one or more aromatic rings (including aryl and heteroaryl) fused to the heterocycloalkyl ring, for example, isoindolinyl [i.e. a pyrrolidinyl ring (an example of 5- membered heterocycloalkyl) fused to a benzo ring (an example of aryl)]. The heterocycloalkyl group optionally can be substituted by 1 or more (e.g., 1 to 5) suitable substituents, when so specified.

[0155] Some examples of 4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl include azetidinyl, oxetanyl, tetrahydrofuranyl, imidazolidinyl, pyrrolidinyl, piperidinyl, piperazinyl, oxazolidinyl, thiazolidinyl, pyrazolidinyl, thiomorpholinyl, tetrahydrothiazinyl, tetrahydrothiadiazinyl, morpholinyl, tetrahydrodiazinyl, and tetrahydropyranyl (also known as oxanyl). Some further examples of 4- to 7-heterocycloalkyl include tetrahydrofuran-2-yl, tetrahydrofuran-3-yl, tetrahydropyranyl (e.g., tetrahydro-2 / 7-pyran-4-yl), imidazolidin-1 -yl, imidazolidin-2-yl, imidazolidin-4-yl, pyrrolidin-1 -yl, pyrrolidin-2-yl, pyrrolidin-3-yl, piperidin-1-yl, piperidin-2-yl, piperidin-3-yl, piperidin-4-yl, piperazin-1 -yl, piperazin-2-yl, 1 ,3-oxazolidin-3-yl, 1 ,4-oxazepan-2-yl, isothiazolidinyl, 1 ,3- thiazolidin-3-yl, 1 ,2-pyrazolidin-2-yl, 1 ,2-tetrahydrothiazin-2-yl, 1 ,3-thiazinan-3-yl, 1 ,2- tetrahydrodiazin-2-yl, 1 ,3-tetrahydrodiazin-1 -yl, 1 ,4-oxazin-4-yl, oxazolidinonyl, 2-oxo- piperidinyl (e.g., 2-oxo-piperidin-1-yl), 2-oxoazepan-3-yl, and the like.

[0156] As used herein, the term “heteroaryl” refers to monocyclic or fused-ring polycyclic aromatic heterocyclic groups with one or more heteroatom ring members (ring-forming atoms) each independently selected from O, S and N in at least one ring. The heteroaryl group has 5 to 14 ring-forming atoms, including 1 to 13 carbon atoms, and 1 to 8 heteroatoms selected from O, S, and N. In some embodiments, the heteroaryl group has 5 to 10 ring-forming atoms including one to four heteroatoms. The heteroaryl group can also contain one to three oxo or thiono (i.e., =S) groups. In some embodiments, the heteroaryl group has 5 to 8 ring-forming atoms including one, two or three heteroatoms. For example, the term "5-membered heteroaryl” refers to a monocyclic heteroaryl group as defined above with 5 ring-forming atoms in the monocyclic heteroaryl ring; the term "6-membered heteroaryl” refers to a monocyclic heteroaryl group as defined above with 6 ring-forming atoms in the monocyclic heteroaryl ring; and the term "5- or 6-membered heteroaryl” refers to a monocyclic heteroaryl group as defined above with 5 or 6 ring-forming atoms in the monocyclic heteroaryl ring. A heteroaryl group optionally can be substituted by 1 or more (e.g., 1 to 5) suitable substituents, when so specified. Examples of monocyclic heteroaryls include those with 5 ring-forming atoms including one to three heteroatoms or those with 6 ring-forming atoms including one, two or three nitrogen heteroatoms. Examples of fused bicyclic heteroaryls include two fused 5- and / or 6-membered monocyclic rings including one to four heteroatoms.

[0157] Some examples of heteroaryl groups include pyridinyl (e.g., pyridin-2-yl, pyridin-3-yl, pyridine-4-yl), pyrazinyl, pyrimidinyl (e.g., pyrimidin-2-yl, pyrimidin-4-yl, or pyrimidin-5-yl), pyridazinyl (e.g., pyridazin-3-yl, or pyridazin-4-yl), thienyl, furyl, imidazolyl (e.g., 1 / 7-imidazol-4- yl), pyrrolyl, oxazolyl (e.g., 1 ,3-oxazolyl, 1 ,2-oxazolyl), thiazolyl (e.g., 1 ,2-thiazolyl, 1 ,3- thiazolyl), pyrazolyl (e.g., pyrazol-1 -yl, pyrazol-3-yl, pyrazol-4-yl), tetrazolyl (e.g., 2 / 7-tetrazol-5- yl), triazolyl (e.g., 1 ,2,3-triazolyl, 1 ,2,4-triazolyl), oxadiazolyl (e.g., 1 ,2,3-oxadiazolyl, 1 ,2,4- oxadiazolyl or 1 ,3,4-oxadiazolyl), thiadiazolyl (e.g., 1 ,3,4-thiadiazolyl, or 1 ,2,4-thiadiazolyl), quinolyl, isoquinolyl, benzothienyl, benzofuryl, indolyl, benzothiazolyl, 1 ,2-benzoxazolyl, 1 / 7- imidazo[4,5-c]pyridinyl, imidazo[1 ,2-a]pyridinyl, 1 / 7-pyrrolo[3,2-c]pyridinyl, imidazo[1 ,2- a]pyrazinyl, imidazo[2,1 -c][1 ,2 ,4]triaziny I , imidazo[1 ,5-a]pyrazinyl, imidazo[1 ,2-a]pyrimidinyl, 1 / 7-indazolyl, 9 / 7-purinyl, imidazo[1 ,2-a]pyrimidinyl, [1 ,2,4]triazolo[1 ,5-a]pyridinyl,

[0158] [1 ,2,4]triazolo[1 ,5-a]pyrimidinyl, [1 ,2,4]triazolo[4,3-b]pyridazinyl, isoxazolo[5,4-c]pyridazinyl, isoxazolo[3,4-c]pyridazinyl, pyrazolo[1 ,5-a]pyrimidinyl, 6,7-dihydro-5 / 7-pyrrolo[1 ,2- b][1 ,2,4]triazolyl, pyridone, pyrimidone, pyrazinone, pyrimidinone, 7 / 7-imidazol-2(3 / 7)-one, 1H- pyrrole-2, 5-dione, 3-oxo-2 / 7-pyridazinyl, 1 / 7-2-oxo-pyrimidinyl, 1 / 7-2-oxo-pyridinyl, 2,4(1 / 7, 3 / 7)- dioxo-pyrimidinyl, 1 / 7-2-oxo-pyrazinyl, and the like.

[0159] As used herein, the term “carboxylic acid bioisostere group” in RArefers to a moiety replacing -C(=O)-OH of RAin a compound of Forula I [including e.g. Formula la, II, etc.] having -C(=O)-OH as RAwith which would result in another compound of Forula I that would exhibit broadly similar biological activity to the corresponding compound of Forula I wherein RAis - C(=O)-OH (and wherein other variables are the same for both compounds). Carboxylic acid bioisostere groups are known to those skilled in the art. See e.g. K. Bredael et. al, "Carboxylic Acid Bioisosteres in Medicinal Chemistry: Synthesis and Properties", Journal of Chemistry, vol. 2022, Article ID 2164558, 21 pages, 2022; and Ballatore C, et. al, “Carboxylic acid (bio)isosteres in drug design,” ChemMedChem. 2013 Mar; 8(3):385-95. In some embodiments, the “carboxylic acid bioisostere group” in RAis an aromatic heterocycle, such as 1 / - / -tetrazo l-5-y I, 3-hydroxyisoxazol-5-yl, 5(4 / 7)-oxo-1 ,2,4-oxadiazol-3-yl-, 5(4 / 7)-oxo-1 ,2,4- thiadiazol-3-yl-, 2-thioxo-1 ,3,4-oxadiazol-5-yl-, 4 / 7-1 ,2,4-triazol-3-yl-, 1 / 7-imidazol-5-yl, 4- hydroxy-1 ,2,5-oxadiazol-3-yl, 1 -hydroxypyrazol-5-yl, or 3-hydroxy-1 / 7-pyrazol-1-yl-. Additional carboxylic acid bioisostere groups include hydroxamic acid -C(=O)-NH(OH), trifluoromethylketone -C(=O)CF3, 2,2,2-trifluoroethan-1 -ol -CH(OH)CF3, acyl sulfonamide - C(=O)-NH-S(=O)2-R100, or sulfonylurea -NH-C(=O)-NH-S(=O)2-R200, wherein R100is Ci.6alkyl or phenyl and where the phenyl is optionally substituted with 1 , 2, 3, or 4 substituents each independently selected from halogen, -OH, C1-4 alkyl, C1-4 haloalkyl, C1-4 alkoxy, and C1-4 haloalkoxy; and R200is aryl (e.g. phenyl) or heteroaryl (e.g. 5- or 6-membered heteroaryl) optionally substituted with 1 , 2, 3, or 4 substituents each independently selected from halogen, -OH, C1-4 alkyl, C1-4 haloalkyl, C1-4 alkoxy, and C1-4 haloalkoxy. In some embodiments, the “carboxylic acid bioisostere group” in RAis selected from 1 / 7-tetrazol-5-yl, 3-hydroxyisoxazol-5- yl, 5(4 / 7)-oxo-1 ,2,4-oxadiazol-3-yl-, 5(4 / 7)-oxo-1 ,2,4-th iad iazol-3-yl-, 2-thioxo-1 ,3,4-oxadiazol-5- yl-, 4 / 7-1 ,2,4-triazol-3-yl-, 4-hydroxy-1 ,2,5-oxadiazol-3-yl, 1 -hydroxypyrazol-5-yl, and 3-hydroxy- 1 / 7-pyrazol-1-yl-. In some other embodiments, the “carboxylic acid bioisostere group” in RAis - C(=O)-NH-S(=O)2-R100wherein R100is C1-6 alkyl or phenyl and where the phenyl is optionally substituted with 1 , 2, 3, or 4 substituents each independently selected from halogen, -OH, C1-4 alkyl, C1-4 haloalkyl, C1-4 alkoxy, and C1.4 haloalkoxy.

[0160] As used herein, the compound of Formula I as described herein includes optional substitutions and variables. It is understood that the normal valency of each of the designated (optionally substituted) atom or moiety is not exceeded, and that any of the optional substitution results in a stable compound. It is also understood that combinations of optional substituents and / or variables are permissible only if such combinations result in a stable compound.

[0161] As used herein, when a group is described to be optionally substituted, it means that the group can be either unsubstituted or substituted with one or more substitutents as specified.

[0162] As used herein, unless otherwise specified, the point of attachment of a substituent can be from any suitable position of the substituent. For example, piperidinyl can be piperidin-1-yl (attached through the N atom of the piperidinyl), piperidin-2-yl (attached through the C atom at the 2-position of the piperidinyl), piperidin-3-yl (attached through the C atom at the 3-position of the piperidinyl), or piperidin-4-yl (attached through the C atom at the 4-position of the piperidinyl). For another example, propanyl (or propyl) can be propan-1 -yl (or 1 -propyl) or propan-2-yl (or 2-propyl).

[0163] As used herein, the point of attachment of a substituent can be specified to indicate the position where the substituent is attached to another moiety. For example, “-C1-4 alkyl-(C3.4 cycloalkyl)” or “(C3-4 cycloalkyl)-Ci.4alkyl-” means the point of attachment occurs at the “C1-4 alkyl” part of the “-C1-4 alkyl-(C3.4cycloalkyl)” or“(C3.4cycloalkyl)-Ci.4alkyl-.”

[0164] When a substituted or optionally substituted moiety is described without indicating the atom via which such moiety is bonded to a substituent, then the substituent may be bonded via any appropriate atom in such moiety. For example in a substituted “-C1-4 alkyl-(C3.4cycloalkyl)” or “(C3-4 cycloalkyl)-Ci-4 alkyl-”, a substituent on the cycloalkylalkyl [i.e., “-C1-4 alkyl-(C3.4 cycloalkyl)” or “(C3.4cycloalkyl)-Ci.4alkyl-”] can be bonded to any carbon atom on the alkyl part or on the cycloalkyl part of the cycloalkylalkyl. Combinations of substituents and / or variables are permissible only if such combinations result in stable compounds.

[0165] As used herein, the term “adjacent” in describing the relative positions of two substituent groups on a ring structure refers to two substituent groups that are respectively attached to two ring-forming atoms of the same ring, wherein the two ring-forming atoms are directly connected through a chemical bond. For example, in the following structure: either of R60and R80is an adjacent group of R70.

[0166] “Mammals” refers to warm-blooded vertebrate animals characterized by the secretion of milk by females for the nourishment of the young, such as guinea pigs, mice, rats, gerbils, cats, rabbits, dogs, cattle, goats, sheep, horses, monkeys, chimpanzees, and humans.

[0167] The term “pharmaceutically acceptable” means the substance (e.g., the compounds of the invention) and any salt thereof, or composition containing the substance or salt of the invention that is suitable for administration to a patient.

[0168] As used herein, the expressions "reaction-inert solvent" and "inert solvent" refer to a solvent or a mixture thereof which does not interact with starting materials, reagents, intermediates or products in a manner which adversely affects the yield of the desired product.

[0169] As used herein, the term "selectivity" or "selective" refers to a greater effect of a compound in a first assay, compared to the effect of the same compound in a second assay. For example, in “gut-selective” compounds, the first assay is for the half-life of the compound in the intestine and the second assay is for the half-life of the compound in the liver.

[0170] “Therapeutically effective amount” means an amount of a compound of the present invention that (i) treats or prevents the particular disease, condition, or disorder; (ii) attenuates, ameliorates, or eliminates one or more symptoms of the particular disease, condition, or disorder; or (iii) prevents or delays the onset of one or more symptoms of the particular disease, condition, or disorder described herein. The term "treating", "treat", or "treatment" as used herein embraces both preventative, i.e., prophylactic, and palliative treatment, including reversing, relieving, alleviating, or slowing the progression of the disease (or disorder or condition) or any tissue damage associated with one or more symptoms of the disease (or disorder or condition).

[0171] As used herein, the term “contacting” refers to the bringing together of indicated moieties in an in vitro system or an in vivo system. For example, “contacting” GIPR with a compound of the invention includes the administration of a compound of the present invention to a mammal, such as a human, having the GIPR, as well as, for example, introducing a compound of the invention into a sample containing a cellular or purified preparation containing the GIPR.

[0172] Every embodiment, Example, or pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof may be claimed individually or grouped together in any combination with any number of each and every embodiment described herein.

[0173] The compound of the invention [a compound of Formula I or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof (also including, e.g., a compound of Formula la, II, Ila, III, Illa, IV, IVa, V, Va, VI, Via, VII, Vila, VIII, Villa, IX, IXa, IX-1 , IXa-1 , IX-2, IXa-2, IX-3, IXa-3, X, or Xa, or a pharmaceutically acceptble salt thereof)] can be used in any of the pharmaceutical compositions, uses, and methods of the invention described herein.

[0174] Pharmaceutical Compositions

[0175] The present invention also provides a composition (e.g., a pharmaceutical composition) comprising the compound of the invention. Accordingly, in one embodiment, the invention provides a pharmaceutical composition comprising (a therapeutically effective amount of) the compound of the invention and optionally comprising a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier. In addition to the compounds of the invention, the pharmaceutical composition of the invention may also contain, or be co-administered (e.g. simultaneously, sequentially, together, or separately) with, one or more pharmacological agents of value in treating one or more disease conditions referred to herein. In one further embodiment, the invention provides a pharmaceutical composition comprising (a therapeutically effective amount of) a compound of Formula I or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, optionally comprising a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier and, optionally, at least one additional medicinal or pharmaceutical agent (such as an anti-diabetic agent or weight management agent). In one embodiment, the additional medicinal or pharmaceutical agent is anti-diabetic agent as described below.

[0176] A "pharmaceutical composition" of the invention refers to a mixture of (1) one or more of the compounds of the invention as an active ingredient (e.g. a compound of Formula I or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, including any solvate, hydrate, solid form, stereoisomer, tautomer, or prodrug) and (2) at least one pharmaceutically acceptable excipient. The term ’excipient’ is used herein to describe any ingredient other than the compound(s) of the invention. The choice of excipient will to a large extent depend on factors such as the mode of administration, the effect of the excipient on solubility and stability, and the nature of the dosage form.

[0177] As used herein, "excipient” includes any and all solvents, dispersion media, coatings, antibacterial agents, antifungal agents, isotonic agents, absorption delaying agents, carriers, diluents and the like that are physiologically compatible. Examples of excipients include one or more of water, saline, phosphate buffered saline, dextrose, glycerol, ethanol and the like, as well as combinations thereof, and may include isotonic agents, for example, sugars, sodium chloride, or polyalcohols such as mannitol, or sorbitol in the composition. Examples of excipients also include various organic solvents (such as hydrates and solvates). The pharmaceutical compositions may, if desired, contain additional excipients such as flavorings, binders / binding agents, lubricating agents, disintegrants, sweetening or flavoring agents, coloring matters or dyes, and the like. For example, for oral administration, tablets containing various excipients, such as citric acid may be employed together with various disintegrants such as starch, alginic acid and certain complex silicates and with binding agents such as sucrose, gelatin and acacia. Examples, without limitation, of excipients include calcium carbonate, calcium phosphate, various sugars and types of starch, cellulose derivatives, gelatin, vegetable oils and polyethylene glycols. Additionally, lubricating agents such as magnesium stearate, sodium lauryl sulfate and talc are often useful for tableting purposes. Solid compositions of a similar type may also be employed in soft and hard filled gelatin capsules. Non-limiting examples of excipients, therefore, also include lactose or milk sugar and high molecular weight polyethylene glycols. When aqueous suspensions or elixirs are desired for oral administration the active compound therein may be combined with various sweetening or flavoring agents, coloring matters or dyes and, if desired, emulsifying agents or suspending agents, together with additional excipients such as water, ethanol, propylene glycol, glycerin, or combinations thereof.

[0178] Examples of excipients also include pharmaceutically acceptable substances such as wetting agents or minor amounts of auxiliary substances such as wetting or emulsifying agents, preservatives, or buffers, which enhance the shelf life or effectiveness of the compound.

[0179] The compositions of this invention may be in a variety of forms. These include, for example, liquid, semi-solid and solid dosage forms, such as liquid solutions (e.g., injectable and infusible solutions), dispersions or suspensions, tablets, capsules, pills, powders, liposomes and suppositories. The form depends on the intended mode of administration and therapeutic application.

[0180] Some compositions are in the form of injectable or infusible solutions, such as compositions similar to those used for passive immunization of humans with antibodies in general. One mode of administration is parenteral (e.g., intravenous, subcutaneous, intraperitoneal, intramuscular). In another embodiment, the compound is administered by intravenous infusion or injection. In yet another embodiment, the compound is administered by intramuscular or subcutaneous injection.

[0181] Oral administration of a solid dosage form may be, for example, presented in discrete units, such as hard or soft capsules, pills, cachets, lozenges, or tablets, each containing a predetermined amount of at least one compound of the invention. In another embodiment, the oral administration may be in a powder or granule form. In another embodiment, the oral dosage form is sub-lingual, such as, for example, a lozenge. In such solid dosage forms, the compounds of the invention are ordinarily combined with one or more adjuvants. Such capsules or tablets may comprise a controlled release formulation. In the case of capsules, tablets, and pills, the dosage forms also may comprise buffering agents or may be prepared with enteric coatings.

[0182] In another embodiment, oral administration may be in a liquid dosage form. Liquid dosage forms for oral administration include, for example, pharmaceutically acceptable emulsions, solutions, suspensions, syrups, and elixirs containing inert diluents commonly used in the art (e.g., water). Such compositions also may comprise adjuvants, such as one or more of wetting, emulsifying, suspending, flavoring (e.g., sweetening), or perfuming agents.

[0183] In another embodiment, the invention comprises a parenteral dosage form. "Parenteral administration" includes, for example, subcutaneous injections, intravenous injections, intraperitoneal injections, intramuscular injections, intrasternal injections, and infusion. Injectable preparations (i.e., sterile injectable aqueous or oleaginous suspensions) may be formulated according to the known art using one or more of suitable dispersing, wetting agents, or suspending agents.

[0184] In another embodiment, the invention comprises a topical dosage form. "Topical administration" includes, for example, dermal and transdermal administration, such as via transdermal patches or iontophoresis devices, intraocular administration, or intranasal or inhalation administration. Compositions for topical administration also include, for example, topical gels, sprays, ointments, and creams. A topical formulation may include a compound which enhances absorption or penetration of the active ingredient through the skin or other affected areas. When the compounds of this invention are administered by a transdermal device, administration will be accomplished using a patch either of the reservoir and porous membrane type or of a solid matrix variety. Typical formulations for this purpose include gels, hydrogels, lotions, solutions, creams, ointments, dusting powders, dressings, foams, films, skin patches, wafers, implants, sponges, fibers, bandages and microemulsions. Liposomes may also be used. Typical excipients include alcohol, water, mineral oil, liquid petrolatum, white petrolatum, glycerin, polyethylene glycol and propylene glycol. Penetration enhancers may be incorporated - see, for example, B. C. Finnin and T. M. Morgan, J. Pharm. Sci., vol. 88, pp. 955- 958, 1999. Formulations suitable for topical administration to the eye include, for example, eye drops wherein the compound of this invention is dissolved or suspended in a suitable excipient. A typical formulation suitable for ocular or aural administration may be in the form of drops of a micronized suspension or solution in isotonic, pH-adjusted, sterile saline. Other formulations suitable for ocular and aural administration include ointments, biodegradable (i.e., absorbable gel sponges, collagen) and non-biodegradable (i.e., silicone) implants, wafers, lenses and particulate or vesicular systems, such as niosomes or liposomes. A polymer such as crossed linked polyacrylic acid, polyvinyl alcohol, hyaluronic acid, a cellulosic polymer, for example, hydroxypropylmethylcellulose, hydroxyethylcellulose, or methylcellulose, or a heteropolysaccharide polymer, for example, gelan gum, may be incorporated together with a preservative, such as benzalkonium chloride. Such formulations may also be delivered by iontophoresis.

[0185] For intranasal administration, the compounds of the invention are conveniently delivered in the form of a solution or suspension from a pump spray container that is squeezed or pumped by the patient or as an aerosol spray presentation from a pressurized container or a nebulizer, with the use of a suitable propellant. Formulations suitable for intranasal administration are typically administered in the form of a dry powder (either alone, as a mixture, for example, in a dry blend with lactose, or as a mixed component particle, for example, mixed with phospholipids, such as phosphatidylcholine) from a dry powder inhaler or as an aerosol spray from a pressurized container, pump, spray, atomizer (preferably an atomizer using electrohydrodynamics to produce a fine mist), or nebulizer, with or without the use of a suitable propellant, such as 1 ,1 ,1 ,2-tetrafluoroethane or 1 ,1 ,1 ,2,3,3,3-heptafluoropropane. For intranasal use, the powder may comprise a bioadhesive agent, for example, chitosan or cyclodextrin.

[0186] In another embodiment, the invention comprises a rectal dosage form. Such rectal dosage form may be in the form of, for example, a suppository. Cocoa butter is a traditional suppository base, but various alternatives may be used as appropriate.

[0187] Other excipients and modes of administration known in the pharmaceutical art may also be used. Pharmaceutical compositions of the invention may be prepared by any of the well- known techniques of pharmacy, such as effective formulation and administration procedures. The above considerations in regard to effective formulations and administration procedures are well known in the art and are described in standard textbooks. Formulation of drugs is discussed in, for example, Ansel, Howard C., et al., Ansel’s Pharmaceutical Dosage Forms and Drug Delivery Systems. Philadelphia: Lippincott, Williams & Wilkins, 2004; Gennaro, Alfonso R., et al. Remington: The Science and Practice of Pharmacy. Philadelphia: Lippincott, Williams & Wilkins, 2000; Rowe, Raymond C. Handbook of Pharmaceutical Excipients. Chicago, Pharmaceutical Press, 2005; Stahl, P. Heinrich and Camilli G. Wermuth, Eds. Handbook of Pharmaceutical Salts: Properties, Selection, and Use. New York: Wiley-VCH, 2011 ; and Brittain, Harry G., Ed. Polymorphism in Pharmaceutical Solids. New York: Informa Healthcare USA, Inc., 2016.

[0188] Acceptable excipients are nontoxic to subjects at the dosages and concentrations employed, and may comprise one or more of the following: 1) buffers such as phosphate, citrate, or other organic acids; 2) salts such as sodium chloride; 3) antioxidants such as ascorbic acid or methionine; 4) preservatives such as octadecyldimethylbenzyl ammonium chloride, hexamethonium chloride, benzalkonium chloride, benzethonium chloride, phenol, butyl or benzyl alcohol; 5) alkyl parabens such as methyl or propyl paraben, catechol, resorcinol, cyclohexanol, 3-pentanol, or m-cresol; 6) low molecular weight (less than about 10 residues) polypeptides; 7) proteins such as serum albumin, gelatin, or immunoglobulins; 8) hydrophilic polymers such as polyvinylpyrrolidone; 9) amino acids such as glycine, glutamine, asparagine, histidine, arginine, or lysine; 10) monosaccharides, disaccharides, or other carbohydrates including glucose, mannose, or dextrins; 11) chelating agents such as EDTA; 12) sugars such as sucrose, mannitol, trehalose or sorbitol; 13) salt-forming counter-ions such as sodium, metal complexes (e.g., Zn-protein complexes), or 14) non-ionic surfactants such as polysorbates (e.g., polysorbate 20 or polysorbate 80), poloxamers or polyethylene glycol (PEG).

[0189] For oral administration, the compositions may be provided in the form of tablets or capsules containing 0.01 , 0.05, 0.1 , 0.5, 1.0, 2.5, 5.0, 10.0, 15.0, 25.0, 50.0, 75.0, 100, 125, 150, 175, 200, 250 or 500 milligrams of the active ingredient for the symptomatic adjustment of the dosage to the patient. A medicament typically contains from about 0.01 mg to about 500 mg of the active ingredient, or in another embodiment, from about 1 mg to about 100 mg of active ingredient. Intravenously, doses may range from about 0.01 to about 10 mg / kg / minute during a constant rate infusion.

[0190] Liposome-containing compounds of the invention may be prepared by methods known in the art (See, for example, Chang, H.I.; Yeh, M.K.; Clinical development of liposome-based drugs: formulation, characterization, and therapeutic efficacy; Int J Nanomedicine 2012; 7; 49- 60). Particularly useful liposomes may be generated by the reverse phase evaporation method with a lipid composition comprising phosphatidylcholine, cholesterol and PEG-derivatized phosphatidylethanolamine (PEG-PE). Liposomes are extruded through filters of defined pore size to yield liposomes with the desired diameter.

[0191] Compounds of the invention may also be entrapped in microcapsules prepared, for example, by coacervation techniques or by interfacial polymerization, for example, hydroxymethylcellulose or gelatin microcapsules and poly-(methylmethacrylate) microcapsules, respectively, in colloidal drug delivery systems (for example, liposomes, albumin microspheres, microemulsions, nano-particles and nanocapsules) or in macroemulsions. Such techniques are disclosed in Remington, The Science and Practice of Pharmacy, 20th Ed., Mack Publishing (2000). Sustained-release preparations may be used. Suitable examples of sustained-release preparations include semi-permeable matrices of solid hydrophobic polymers containing a compound of the invention, which matrices are in the form of shaped articles, e.g., films, or microcapsules. Examples of sustained-release matrices include polyesters, hydrogels (for example, poly(2-hydroxyethyl-methacrylate), or 'poly(vinylalcohol)), polylactides, copolymers of L-glutamic acid and 7 ethyl-L-glutamate, non-degradable ethylene-vinyl acetate, degradable lactic acid-glycolic acid copolymers such as those used in leuprolide acetate for depot suspension (injectable microspheres composed of lactic acid-glycolic acid copolymer and leuprolide acetate), sucrose acetate isobutyrate, and poly-D-(-)-3-hydroxybutyric acid.

[0192] The formulations to be used for intravenous administration must be sterile. This is readily accomplished by, for example, filtration through sterile filtration membranes. Compounds of the invention are generally placed into a container having a sterile access port, for example, an intravenous solution bag or vial having a stopper pierceable by a hypodermic injection needle.

[0193] Suitable emulsions may be prepared using commercially available fat emulsions, such as a lipid emulsions comprising soybean oil, a fat emulsion for intravenous administration (e.g., comprising safflower oil, soybean oil, egg phosphatides and glycerin in water), emulsions containing soya bean oil and medium-chain triglycerides, and lipid emulsions of cottonseed oil. The active ingredient may be either dissolved in a pre-mixed emulsion composition or alternatively it may be dissolved in an oil (e.g., soybean oil, safflower oil, cottonseed oil, sesame oil, corn oil or almond oil) and an emulsion formed upon mixing with a phospholipid (e.g., egg phospholipids, soybean phospholipids or soybean lecithin) and water. It will be appreciated that other ingredients may be added, for example glycerol or glucose, to adjust the tonicity of the emulsion. Suitable emulsions will typically contain up to 20% oil, for example, between 5 and 20%. The fat emulsion may comprise fat droplets between 0.1 and 1.0 pm, particularly 0.1 and 0.5 pm, and have a pH in the range of 5.5 to 8.0.

[0194] For example, the emulsion compositions may be those prepared by mixing a compound of the invention with a lipid emulsions comprising soybean oil or the components thereof (soybean oil, egg phospholipids, glycerol and water).

[0195] Compositions for inhalation or insufflation include solutions and suspensions in pharmaceutically acceptable aqueous or organic solvents, or mixtures thereof, and powders. The liquid or solid compositions may contain suitable pharmaceutically acceptable excipients as set out above. In some embodiments, the compositions are administered by the oral or nasal respiratory route for local or systemic effect. Compositions in preferably sterile pharmaceutically acceptable solvents may be nebulized by use of gases. Nebulized solutions may be breathed directly from the nebulizing device or the nebulizing device may be attached to a face mask, tent or intermittent positive pressure breathing machine. Solution, suspension or powder compositions may be administered, preferably orally or nasally, from devices which deliver the formulation in an appropriate manner.

[0196] A drug product intermediate (DPI) is a partly processed material that must undergo further processing steps before it becomes bulk drug product. Compounds of the invention may be formulated into drug product intermediate DPI containing the active ingredient in a higher free energy form than the crystalline form. One reason to use a DPI is to improve oral absorption characteristics due to low solubility, slow dissolution, improved mass transport through the mucus layer adjacent to the epithelial cells, and in some cases, limitations due to biological barriers such as metabolism and transporters. Other reasons may include improved solid state stability and downstream manufacturability. In one embodiment, the drug product intermediate contains a compound of the invention isolated and stabilized in the amorphous state (for example, amorphous solid dispersions (ASDs)). There are many techniques known in the art to manufacture ASD’s that produce material suitable for integration into a bulk drug product, for example, spray dried dispersions (SDD’s), melt extrudates (often referred to as HME’s), co-precipitates, amorphous drug nanoparticles, and nano-adsorbates. In one embodiment amorphous solid dispersions comprise a compound of the invention and a polymer excipient. Other excipients as well as concentrations of said excipients and the compound of the invention are well known in the art and are described in standard textbooks. See, for example, “Amorphous Solid Dispersions Theory and Practice" by Navnit Shah et al.

[0197] The pharmaceutical composition may, for example, be in a form suitable for oral administration as a tablet, capsule, pill, powder, sustained release formulation, solution or suspension, for parenteral injection as a sterile solution, suspension or emulsion, for topical administration as an ointment or cream or for rectal administration as a suppository.

[0198] Exemplary parenteral administration forms include solutions or suspensions of active compounds in sterile aqueous solutions, for example, aqueous propylene glycol or dextrose solutions. Such dosage forms may be suitably buffered, if desired.

[0199] The pharmaceutical composition may be in unit dosage forms suitable for single administration of precise dosages. One of ordinary skill in the art would appreciate that the composition may be formulated in sub-therapeutic dosage such that multiple doses are envisioned.

[0200] In one embodiment the composition comprises (a therapeutically effective amount of) a compound of Formula I or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof and a pharmaceutically acceptable excipient.

[0201] Administration and Dosing

[0202] The term "treating", "treat" or "treatment" as used herein embraces both preventative, i.e., prophylactic, and palliative treatment, i.e., relieve, alleviate, or slow the progression of the patient’s disease (or condition) or any tissue damage associated with the disease. As used herein, the terms, “subject, “individual” or “patient,” used interchangeably, refer to any animal, including mammals. Mammals according to the invention include canine, feline, bovine, caprine, equine, ovine, porcine, rodents, lagomorphs, primates, humans and the like, and encompass mammals in utero. In an embodiment, humans are suitable subjects. Human subjects may be of any gender and at any stage of development.

[0203] As used herein, the phrase “therapeutically effective amount” refers to the amount of active compound or pharmaceutical agent that elicits the biological or medicinal response in a tissue, system, animal, individual or human that is being sought by a researcher, veterinarian, medical doctor or other clinician, which may include one or more of the following:

[0204] (1) preventing a condition, disease, or disorder; for example, preventing the condition, disease, or disorder in an individual that may be predisposed to the condition, disease, or disorder but does not yet experience or display the pathology or symptomatology of the disease;

[0205] (2) inhibiting a condition, disease, or disorder; for example, inhibiting the condition, disease, or disorder in an individual that is experiencing or displaying the pathology or symptomatology of the condition, disease, or disorder [i.e., arresting (or slowing) further development of the pathology or symptomatology or both]; and

[0206] (3) ameliorating a condition, disease, or disorder; for example, ameliorating the condition, disease, or disorder in an individual that is experiencing or displaying the pathology or symptomatology of the condition, disease, or disorder [i.e., reversing the pathology or symptomatology or both].

[0207] Typically, a compound of the invention is administered in an amount effective to treat a condition, disease, or disorder as described herein. The compounds of the invention may be administered as compound in the free form, or alternatively, as a pharmaceutically acceptable salt. For administration and dosing purposes, the compound in free form or pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof will simply be referred to as the compounds of the invention.

[0208] The compounds of the invention are administered by any suitable route in the form of a pharmaceutical composition adapted to such a route, and in a dose effective for the treatment intended. Administration of the compounds of this invention can be via any method which delivers a compound of this invention systemically and / or locally. The compounds of the invention may be administered orally, rectally, vaginally, parenterally (including, e.g., intravenous, subcutaneous, intramuscular, intravascular or infusion), topically, intranasally, or by inhalation.

[0209] The compounds of the invention may be administered orally. Oral administration may involve swallowing, so that the compound enters the gastrointestinal tract, or buccal or sublingual administration may be employed by which the compound enters the bloodstream directly from the mouth. In another embodiment, the compounds of the invention may also be administered parenterally, for example directly into the bloodstream, into muscle, or into an internal organ. Suitable means for parenteral administration include intravenous, intraarterial, intraperitoneal, intrathecal, intraventricular, intraurethral, intrasternal, intracranial, intramuscular and subcutaneous. Suitable devices for parenteral administration include needle (including microneedle) injectors, needle-free injectors, and infusion techniques.

[0210] In another embodiment, the compounds of the invention may also be administered topically to the skin or mucosa, that is, dermally or transdermally. In another embodiment, the compounds of the invention may also be administered intranasally or by inhalation. In another embodiment, the compounds of the invention may be administered rectally or vaginally. In another embodiment, the compounds of the invention may also be administered directly to the eye or ear.

[0211] The dosage regimen for the compounds of the invention or compositions containing said compounds is based on a variety of factors, including the type, age, weight, sex and medical condition of the patient; the severity of the condition; the route of administration; and the activity of the particular compound employed. Thus, the dosage regimen may vary widely. In one embodiment, the total daily dose of a compound of the invention is typically from about 0.0001 to about 100 mg / kg (i.e., mg compound of the invention per kg body weight) for the treatment of the indicated conditions discussed herein. In another embodiment, total daily dose of the compound of the invention is from about 0.01 to about 50 mg / kg; and in another embodiment, from about 0.1 to about 50 mg / kg; and in another embodiment, from about 0.5 to about 30 mg / kg. It is not uncommon that the administration of the compounds of the invention will be repeated a plurality of times in a day (typically no greater than 4 times). Multiple doses per day typically may be used to increase the total daily dose, if desired.

[0212] Methods and Uses

[0213] Another embodiment of the present invention includes a compound of Formula I or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt of the compound for use as a medicament, particularly wherein the medicament is for use in the treatment or prevention of a GIPR-related condition, disease, or disorder, including administering to a mammal, such as a human, in need of such treatment.

[0214] Another embodiment of the present invention includes use of a compound of Formula I or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt of the compound as a medicament, particularly wherein the medicament is for use in the treatment or prevention of a GIPR-related condition, disease, or disorder, including administering to a mammal, such as a human, in need of such treatment.

[0215] Another embodiment of the present invention includes use of a compound of Formula I or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt of the compound in the manufacture of a medicament for treating or preventing a GIPR-related condition, disease, or disorder, including administering to a mammal, such as a human, in need of such treatment a therapeutically effective amount.

[0216] Another embodiment of the present invention includes the compound of invention for use as a medicament, particularly wherein the medicament is for use in treating or preventing a condition, disease, or disorder selected from diabetes [e.g. Type 1 diabetes mellitus (T1 D), Type 2 diabetes mellitus (T2DM), including pre-d iabetes], idiopathic T1 D (Type 1 b), latent autoimmune diabetes in adults (LADA), early-onset T2DM (EOD), youth-onset atypical diabetes (YOAD), maturity onset diabetes of the young (MODY), malnutrition-related diabetes, gestational diabetes, hyperglycemia, insulin resistance, hepatic insulin resistance, impaired glucose tolerance, diabetic neuropathy, diabetic nephropathy, kidney disease [e.g., acute kidney disorder, tubular dysfunction, proinflammatory changes to the proximal tubules, or chronic kidney disease (CKD)], diabetic retinopathy, adipocyte dysfunction, visceral adipose deposition, sleep apnea [e.g. obstructive sleep apnea (OSA)], obesity (including hypothalamic obesity and monogenic obesity) and related comorbidities (e.g., osteoarthritis and urine incontinence), eating disorders (including binge eating syndrome, bulimia nervosa, and syndromic obesity such as Prader-Willi and Bardet-Biedl syndromes), weight gain such as weight gain caused by use of other agents (e.g., caused by use of steroids and / or antipsychotics, or caused by treatment of depression, or caused by use of agents on cognitive function), excessive sugar craving, dyslipidemia [including hyperlipidemia, hypertriglyceridemia, increased total cholesterol, high LDL (low-density lipoprotein) cholesterol, and low HDL (high- density lipoprotein) cholesterol], hyperinsulinemia, nonalcoholic fatty liver disease [NAFLD, including related diseases such as steatosis, nonalcoholic steatohepatitis (NASH), fibrosis, cirrhosis, and hepatocellular carcinoma], cardiovascular disease, atherosclerosis (including coronary artery disease), peripheral vascular disease, hypertension, endothelial dysfunction, impaired vascular compliance, heart failure [e.g. congestive heart failure, heart failure with preserved ejection fraction (HFpEF), heart failure with reduced ejection fraction (HFrEF)], myocardial infarction (e.g. necrosis and apoptosis), stroke, hemorrhagic stroke, ischemic stroke, traumatic brain injury, pulmonary hypertension, restenosis after angioplasty, intermittent claudication, post-prandial lipemia, metabolic acidosis, ketosis, arthritis, osteoporosis, osteoarthritis, Parkinson’s disease, left ventricular hypertrophy, peripheral arterial disease (PAD), macular degeneration, cataract, glomerulosclerosis, chronic renal failure, metabolic syndrome, syndrome X, premenstrual syndrome, angina pectoris, thrombosis, atherosclerosis, transient ischemic attacks, vascular restenosis, impaired glucose metabolism, conditions of impaired fasting plasma glucose, hyperuricemia, gout, erectile dysfunction, skin and connective tissue disorders, psoriasis, foot ulcerations, ulcerative colitis, hyper apo B lipoproteinemia, Alzheimer’s Disease, schizophrenia, impaired cognition, inflammatory bowel disease, short bowel syndrome, Crohn’s disease, colitis, irritable bowel syndrome, polycystic ovary syndrome (PCOS), and addiction (e.g., addition to alcohol, nicotine, and / or drug). Another embodiment of the present invention includes use of the compound of invention as a medicament, particularly wherein the medicament is for use in the treatment or prevention of a condition, disease, or disorder selected from diabetes [e.g. Type 1 diabetes mellitus (T1 D), Type 2 diabetes mellitus (T2DM), including pre-d iabetes], idiopathic T1 D (Type 1 b), latent autoimmune diabetes in adults (LADA), early-onset T2DM (EOD), youth-onset atypical diabetes (YOAD), maturity onset diabetes of the young (MODY), malnutrition-related diabetes, gestational diabetes, hyperglycemia, insulin resistance, hepatic insulin resistance, impaired glucose tolerance, diabetic neuropathy, diabetic nephropathy, kidney disease [e.g., acute kidney disorder, tubular dysfunction, proinflammatory changes to the proximal tubules, or chronic kidney disease (CKD)], diabetic retinopathy, adipocyte dysfunction, visceral adipose deposition, sleep apnea [e.g. obstructive sleep apnea (OSA)], obesity (including hypothalamic obesity and monogenic obesity) and related comorbidities (e.g., osteoarthritis and urine incontinence), eating disorders (including binge eating syndrome, bulimia nervosa, and syndromic obesity such as Prader-Willi and Bardet-Biedl syndromes), weight gain such as weight gain caused by use of other agents (e.g., caused by use of steroids and / or antipsychotics, or caused by treatment of depression, or caused by use of agents on cognitive function), excessive sugar craving, dyslipidemia [including hyperlipidemia, hypertriglyceridemia, increased total cholesterol, high LDL (low-density lipoprotein) cholesterol, and low HDL (high- density lipoprotein) cholesterol], hyperinsulinemia, nonalcoholic fatty liver disease [NAFLD, including related diseases such as steatosis, nonalcoholic steatohepatitis (NASH), fibrosis, cirrhosis, and hepatocellular carcinoma], cardiovascular disease, atherosclerosis (including coronary artery disease), peripheral vascular disease, hypertension, endothelial dysfunction, impaired vascular compliance, heart failure [e.g. congestive heart failure, heart failure with preserved ejection fraction (HFpEF), heart failure with reduced ejection fraction (HFrEF)], myocardial infarction (e.g. necrosis and apoptosis), stroke, hemorrhagic stroke, ischemic stroke, traumatic brain injury, pulmonary hypertension, restenosis after angioplasty, intermittent claudication, post-prandial lipemia, metabolic acidosis, ketosis, arthritis, osteoporosis, osteoarthritis, Parkinson’s disease, left ventricular hypertrophy, peripheral arterial disease (PAD), macular degeneration, cataract, glomerulosclerosis, chronic renal failure, metabolic syndrome, syndrome X, premenstrual syndrome, angina pectoris, thrombosis, atherosclerosis, transient ischemic attacks, vascular restenosis, impaired glucose metabolism, conditions of impaired fasting plasma glucose, hyperuricemia, gout, erectile dysfunction, skin and connective tissue disorders, psoriasis, foot ulcerations, ulcerative colitis, hyper apo B lipoproteinemia, Alzheimer’s Disease, schizophrenia, impaired cognition, inflammatory bowel disease, short bowel syndrome, Crohn’s disease, colitis, irritable bowel syndrome, polycystic ovary syndrome (PCOS), and addiction (e.g., addition to alcohol, nicotine, and / or drug).

[0217] Another embodiment of the present invention includes use of the compound of invention for the manufacture of a medicament for treating or preventing a condition, disease, or disorder selected from diabetes [e.g. Type 1 diabetes mellitus (T1 D), Type 2 diabetes mellitus (T2DM), including pre-d iabetes], idiopathic T1 D (Type 1 b), latent autoimmune diabetes in adults (LADA), early-onset T2DM (EOD), youth-onset atypical diabetes (YOAD), maturity onset diabetes of the young (MODY), malnutrition-related diabetes, gestational diabetes, hyperglycemia, insulin resistance, hepatic insulin resistance, impaired glucose tolerance, diabetic neuropathy, diabetic nephropathy, kidney disease [e.g., acute kidney disorder, tubular dysfunction, proinflammatory changes to the proximal tubules, or chronic kidney disease (CKD)], diabetic retinopathy, adipocyte dysfunction, visceral adipose deposition, sleep apnea [e.g. obstructive sleep apnea (OSA)], obesity (including hypothalamic obesity and monogenic obesity) and related comorbidities (e.g., osteoarthritis and urine incontinence), eating disorders (including binge eating syndrome, bulimia nervosa, and syndromic obesity such as Prader-Willi and Bardet-Biedl syndromes), weight gain such as weight gain caused by use of other agents (e.g., caused by use of steroids and / or antipsychotics, or caused by treatment of depression, or caused by use of agents on cognitive function), excessive sugar craving, dyslipidemia [including hyperlipidemia, hypertriglyceridemia, increased total cholesterol, high LDL (low-density lipoprotein) cholesterol, and low HDL (high-density lipoprotein) cholesterol], hyperinsulinemia, nonalcoholic fatty liver disease [NAFLD, including related diseases such as steatosis, nonalcoholic steatohepatitis (NASH), fibrosis, cirrhosis, and hepatocellular carcinoma], cardiovascular disease, atherosclerosis (including coronary artery disease), peripheral vascular disease, hypertension, endothelial dysfunction, impaired vascular compliance, heart failure [e.g. congestive heart failure, heart failure with preserved ejection fraction (HFpEF), heart failure with reduced ejection fraction (HFrEF)], myocardial infarction (e.g. necrosis and apoptosis), stroke, hemorrhagic stroke, ischemic stroke, traumatic brain injury, pulmonary hypertension, restenosis after angioplasty, intermittent claudication, post-prandial lipemia, metabolic acidosis, ketosis, arthritis, osteoporosis, osteoarthritis, Parkinson’s disease, left ventricular hypertrophy, peripheral arterial disease (PAD), macular degeneration, cataract, glomerulosclerosis, chronic renal failure, metabolic syndrome, syndrome X, premenstrual syndrome, angina pectoris, thrombosis, atherosclerosis, transient ischemic attacks, vascular restenosis, impaired glucose metabolism, conditions of impaired fasting plasma glucose, hyperuricemia, gout, erectile dysfunction, skin and connective tissue disorders, psoriasis, foot ulcerations, ulcerative colitis, hyper apo B lipoproteinemia, Alzheimer’s Disease, schizophrenia, impaired cognition, inflammatory bowel disease, short bowel syndrome, Crohn’s disease, colitis, irritable bowel syndrome, polycystic ovary syndrome (PCOS), and addiction (e.g., addition to alcohol, nicotine, and / or drug).

[0218] In some further embodiments of the methods and uses of the present invention described herein, the condition, disease, or disorder that can be treated or prevented in accordance with the present invention is selected from obesity, T2DM, Heart Failure (e.g. HFpEF and HFrEF); CKD; NAFLD, NASH, atherosclerosis, PAD, obstructive sleep apnea, diabetic retinopathy, and diabetic neuropathy.

[0219] The compound of the invention is a GIPR antagonist. Thus, the present invention further provides a method for modulating (e.g. antagonizing) GIPR (either in vitro or in vivo), comprising contacting (including incubating) the GIPR with the compound of Formula I or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof (such as one selected from Examples 1-58 herein) described herein.

[0220] In some embodiments, the amount of the compound of the invention used in any one of the methods (or uses) of the present invention is effective in antagonizing GIPR.

[0221] Stereoisomers

[0222] The compounds of the present invention may contain asymmetric or chiral centers, and, therefore, exist in two or more stereoisomeric forms. Unless specified otherwise, it is intended that all stereoisomeric forms of the compounds of the present invention as well as mixtures thereof, including racemic mixtures, form part of the present invention. In addition, the present invention embraces all geometric and positional isomers. For example, if a compound of the present invention incorporates a double bond or a fused ring, both the cis- and trans- forms, as well as mixtures, are embraced within the scope of the invention.

[0223] Stereoisomers of the compounds may include cis and trans isomers (geometric isomers), optical isomers such as R and S enantiomers, diastereomers, rotational isomers, atropisomers, and conformational isomers. For example, compounds of the invention containing one or more asymmetric carbon atoms may exist as two or more stereoisomers. Where a compound of the invention contains an alkenyl or alkenylene group, geometric cis / trans (or Z / E) isomers are possible. Cis / trans isomers may also exist for saturated rings.

[0224] The pharmaceutically acceptable salts of compounds of the invention may also contain a counterion which is optically active (e.g., D-lactate or L-lysine) or racemic (e.g. DL-tartrate or DL-arginine).

[0225] Cis / trans isomers may be separated by conventional techniques well known to those skilled in the art, for example, chromatography and fractional crystallization.

[0226] Conventional techniques for the preparation / isolation of individual enantiomers include chiral synthesis from a suitable optically pure precursor or resolution of the racemate (orthe racemate of a salt or derivative) using, for example, chiral high-pressure liquid chromatography (HPLC). Alternatively, the racemate (or a racemic precursor) may be reacted with a suitable optically active compound, for example, an alcohol, or, in the case where a compound of the invention contains an acidic or basic moiety, a base or acid such as 1 -phenylethylamine or tartaric acid. The resulting diastereomeric mixture may be separated by chromatography, fractional crystallization, or by using both of said techniques, and one or both of the diastereoisomers converted to the corresponding pure enantiomer(s) by means well known to a skilled person. Chiral compounds of the invention (and chiral precursors thereof) may be obtained in enantiomerically-enriched form using chromatography, typically HPLC. Concentration of the eluate affords the enriched mixture. Chiral chromatography using sub-and supercritical fluids may be employed. Methods for chiral chromatography useful in some embodiments of the present invention are known in the art (see, for example, Smith, Roger M., Loughborough University, Loughborough, UK; Chromatographic Science Series (1998), 75 (Supercritical Fluid Chromatography with Packed Columns), pp. 223-249 and references cited therein).

[0227] When any racemate crystallizes, crystals of two different types are possible. The first type is the racemic compound (true racemate) referred to above wherein one homogeneous form of crystal is produced containing both enantiomers in equimolar amounts. The second type is the racemic mixture or conglomerate wherein two crystal forms are produced in equimolar amounts each comprising a single enantiomer. While both of the crystal forms present in a racemic mixture have identical physical properties, they may have different physical properties compared to the true racemate. Racemic mixtures may be separated by conventional techniques known to those skilled in the art - see, for example, Stereochemistry of Organic Compounds by E. L. Eliel and S. H. Wilen (Wiley, 1994).

[0228] Chiral compounds of the invention (and chiral precursors thereof) may be obtained in enantiomerically enriched form using chromatography, typically high-pressure liquid chromatography (HPLC) or supercritical fluid chromatography (SFC), on a resin with an asymmetric stationary phase and with a mobile phase consisting of a hydrocarbon, typically heptane or hexane, containing from 0 to 50% isopropanol, typically from 2 to 20%, and from 0 to 5% of an alkylamine, typically 0.1% diethylamine (DEA) or isopropylamine. Concentration of the eluent affords the enriched mixture. In the case where SFC is used, the mobile phase may consist of a supercritical fluid, typically carbon dioxide, containing 2-50% of an alcohol, such as methanol, ethanol or isopropanol.

[0229] Diastereomeric mixtures can be separated into their individual diastereoisomers on the basis of their physicochemical differences by methods well known to those skilled in the art, such as by chromatography and / or fractional crystallization. Enantiomers can be separated by converting the enantiomeric mixture into a diastereomeric mixture by reaction with an appropriate optically active compound (e.g., chiral auxiliary such as a chiral alcohol or Mosher’s acid chloride), separating the diastereoisomers and converting (e.g., hydrolyzing) the individual diastereoisomers to the corresponding pure enantiomers. Enantiomers can also be separated by use of a chiral HPLC column. Alternatively, the specific stereoisomers may be synthesized by using an optically active starting material, by asymmetric synthesis using optically active reagents, substrates, catalysts or solvents, or by converting one stereoisomer into the other by asymmetric transformation.

[0230] In some embodiments, the compounds of the invention may have asymmetric carbon atoms. The carbon-carbon bonds of the compounds of Formula I may be depicted herein using a solid line ( > - ), a wavy line (^www^), a solid wedge or a dotted wedge (

[0231] ). The use of a solid line to depict bonds to asymmetric carbon atoms is meant to indicate that all possible stereoisomers (e.g., specific enantiomers, racemic mixtures, etc.) at that carbon atom are included. The use of either a solid or dotted wedge to depict bonds to asymmetric carbon atoms is meant to indicate that only the stereoisomer shown is meant to be included.

[0232] The use of a wavy line to depict bonds to asymmetric carbon atoms is meant to indicate that the stereochemistry is unknown (unless otherwise specified). It is possible that compounds of the invention may contain more than one asymmetric carbon atom. In those compounds, the use of a solid line to depict bonds to asymmetric carbon atoms is meant to indicate that all possible stereoisomers are meant to be included. For example, unless stated otherwise, it is intended that the compounds of the invention can exist as enantiomers and diastereomers or as racemates and mixtures thereof. The use of a solid line to depict bonds to one or more asymmetric carbon atoms in a compound of the invention and the use of a solid or dotted wedge to depict bonds to other asymmetric carbon atoms in the same compound is meant to indicate that a mixture of diastereomers is present.

[0233] Where the compounds of the present invention possess two or more stereogenic centers and the absolute or relative stereochemistry is given in the name, the designations R and S refer respectively to each stereogenic center in ascending numerical order (1 , 2, 3, etc.) according to the conventional IUPAC number schemes for each molecule. Where the compounds of the present invention possess one or more stereogenic centers and no stereochemistry is given in the name or structure, it is understood that the name or structure is intended to encompass all forms of the compound, including the racemic form.

[0234] The compounds of this invention may contain olefin-like double bonds or ring structures. When such bonds or ring structures are present, the compounds of the invention can exist as cis and / or trans configurations and as mixtures thereof. For example, when a double bond is present, when the two higher-priority groups (at each side of the double bond) are oriented in the same direction, the stereoisomer is referred to as cis, whereas when the two higher-priority groups are oriented in opposing directions, the stereoisomer is referred to as trans. The term “cis” can also refer to the orientation of two substituents with reference to each other and the plane of the ring (either both “up” or both “down”). Analogously, the term “trans” can also refer to the orientation of two substituents with reference to each other and the plane of the ring (the substituents being on opposite sides of the ring).

[0235] Included within the scope of the claimed compounds of the present invention are all stereoisomers, geometric isomers and tautomeric forms of the compounds of the invention, including compounds exhibiting more than one type of isomerism, and mixtures of one or more thereof. Also included are acid addition or base salts wherein the counterion is optically active, for example, D-lactate or L-lysine, or racemic, for example, DL-tartrate or DL-arginine. Tautomerism

[0236] Where structural isomers are interconvertible via a low-energy barrier, tautomeric isomerism (‘tautomerism’) may occur. This may take the form of proton tautomerism in compounds of the invention containing, for example, an imino / amino, keto / enol, or oxime / nitroso group, lactam / lactim or so-called valence tautomerism in compounds which contain an aromatic moiety. It follows that a single compound may exhibit more than one type of isomerism .

[0237] It must be emphasized that while, for conciseness, the compounds of the invention have been drawn herein in a single tautomeric form, all possible tautomeric forms are included within the scope of the invention.

[0238] It is possible that the intermediates and compounds of the present invention may exist in different tautomeric forms, and all such forms are embraced within the scope of the invention. The term “tautomer” or “tautomeric form” refers to structural isomers of different energies which are interconvertible via a low energy barrier. For example, proton tautomers (also known as prototropic tautomers) include interconversions via migration of a proton, such as keto-enol and imine-enamine isomerizations.

[0239] Valence tautomers include interconversions by reorganization of some of the bonding electrons.

[0240] Isotopes

[0241] The present invention includes all pharmaceutically acceptable isotopically labelled compounds of the invention wherein one or more atoms are replaced by atoms having the same atomic number, but an atomic mass or mass number different from the atomic mass or mass number usually found in nature.

[0242] Examples of isotopes suitable for inclusion in the compounds of the invention include isotopes of hydrogen, such as2H and3H, carbon, such as11C,13C and14C, chlorine, such as36CI, fluorine, such as18F, iodine, such as123l,124l and125l, nitrogen, such as13N and15N, oxygen, such as15O,17O and18O, phosphorus, such as32P, and sulphur, such as35S.

[0243] Certain isotopically labelled compounds of Formula I, for example, those incorporating a radioactive isotope, are useful in drug and / or substrate tissue distribution studies. The radioactive isotopes tritium, i.e.,3H, and carbon-14, i.e.,14C, are particularly useful for this purpose in view of their ease of incorporation and ready means of detection.

[0244] Substitution with heavier isotopes such as deuterium, i.e.,2H, may afford certain therapeutic advantages resulting from greater metabolic stability, for example, increased in vivo half-life or reduced dosage requirements, and hence may be preferred in some circumstances.

[0245] In some embodiments, the disclosure provides deuterium-labeled (or deuterated) compounds and salts, where the formula and variables of such compounds and salts are each and independently as described herein. “Deuterated” means that at least one of the atoms in the compound is deuterium in an abundance that is greater than the natural abundance of deuterium (typically approximately 0.015%). A skilled artisan recognized that in chemical compounds with a hydrogen atom, the hydrogen atom actually represents a mixture of H and D, with about 0.015% being D. The concentration of the deuterium incorporated into the deuterium-labeled compounds and salt of the invention may be defined by the deuterium enrichment factor. It is understood that one or more deuterium may exchange with hydrogen under physiological conditions.

[0246] In some embodiments, one or more hydrogen atoms on certain metabolic sites on the compounds of the invention may be deuterated. MetaSite (moldiscovery.com / software / metasite / ) may be helpful in predicting some metabolic sites on the compounds of the invention.

[0247] Substitution with positron-emitting isotopes, such as11C,18F,15O and13N, can be useful in Positron Emission Tomography (PET) studies for examining substrate receptor occupancy.

[0248] Isotopically labelled compounds of the invention can generally be prepared by conventional techniques known to those skilled in the art or by processes analogous to those described in the accompanying Examples and Preparations using an appropriate isotopically labelled reagent in place of the non-labelled reagent previously employed.

[0249] Pharmaceutically acceptable solvates (including hydrates) in accordance with the invention include those wherein the solvent of crystallization may be isotopically substituted, e.g., D2O, d6-acetone, d6-DMSO.

[0250] Salts

[0251] The compounds of the present invention may be isolated and used per se, or when possible, in the form of its pharmaceutically acceptable salt. The term “salts” refers to inorganic and organic salts of a compound of the present invention. These salts can be prepared in situ during the final isolation and purification of a compound, or by separately treating the compound with a suitable organic or inorganic acid or base and isolating the salt thus formed.

[0252] Salts encompassed within the term “pharmaceutically acceptable salts” refer to the compounds of the invention which are generally prepared by reacting the free base with a suitable organic or inorganic acid to provide a salt of the compound of the invention that is suitable for administration to a patient, or by reacting the free acid with a suitable organic or inorganic base to provide a salt of the compound of the invention that is suitable for administration to a patient.

[0253] In addition, the compounds of the invention may also include other salts of such compounds which are not necessarily pharmaceutically acceptable salts, which may be useful as intermediates for one or more of the following: 1) preparing compounds of Formula I; 2) purifying compounds of Formula I; 3) separating enantiomers of compounds of Formula I; or 4) separating diastereomers of compounds of Formula I.

[0254] Suitable base salts are formed from bases which form non-toxic salts. Examples include, but are not limited to aluminum, ammonium, arginine, benzathine, calcium, choline, diethylamine, diolamine, glycine, lysine, magnesium, meglumine, olamine, potassium, sodium, tromethamine and zinc salts.

[0255] Hemisalts of acids and bases may also be formed, for example, hemisulfate and hemicalcium salts.

[0256] For a review on suitable salts, see Paulekun, G. S. et al., Trends in Active Pharmaceutical Ingredient Salt Selection Based on Analysis of the Orange Book Database, J. Med. Chem. 2007; 50(26), 6665-6672.

[0257] Pharmaceutically acceptable salts of compounds of the invention may be prepared by methods well known to one skilled in the art, including but not limited to the following procedures

[0258] (i) by reacting a compound of the invention with the desired acid or base;

[0259] (ii) by removing an acid- or base-labile protecting group from a suitable precursor of a compound of the invention or by ring-opening a suitable cyclic precursor, for example, a lactone or lactam, using the desired acid or base; or

[0260] (iii) by converting one salt of a compound of the invention to another. This may be accomplished by reaction with an appropriate acid or base or by means of a suitable ion exchange procedure.

[0261] These procedures are typically carried out in solution. The resulting salt may precipitate out and be collected by filtration or may be recovered by evaporation of the solvent.

[0262] Solvates

[0263] The compounds of the invention (e.g. a compound of Formula I or pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof) may exist in unsolvated and solvated forms. The term ‘solvate’ is used herein to describe a molecular complex comprising the compound of the invention and one or more pharmaceutically acceptable solvent molecules, for example, ethanol. The term ‘hydrate’ is employed when said solvent is water.

[0264] In addition, the compounds of the invention may also include other solvates of such compounds that are not necessarily pharmaceutically acceptable solvates, which may be useful as intermediates for one or more of the following: 1) preparing compounds of Formula I or their salts; 2) purifying compounds of Formula I or their salts; 3) separating enantiomers of compounds of Formula I or their salts; or 4) separating diastereomers of compounds of Formula I or their salts.

[0265] A currently accepted classification system for organic hydrates is one that defines isolated site, channel, or metal-ion coordinated hydrates - see Polymorphism in Pharmaceutical Solids by K. R. Morris (Ed. H. G. Brittain, Marcel Dekker, 1995). Isolated site hydrates are ones in which the water molecules are isolated from direct contact with each other by intervening organic molecules. In channel hydrates, the water molecules lie in lattice channels where they are next to other water molecules. In metal-ion coordinated hydrates, the water molecules are bonded to the metal ion. When the solvent or water is tightly bound, the complex may have a well-defined stoichiometry independent of humidity. When, however, the solvent or water is weakly bound, as in channel solvates and hygroscopic compounds, the water / solvent content may be dependent on humidity and drying conditions. In such cases, non-stoichiometry will be the norm.

[0266] Complexes

[0267] Also included within the scope of the invention are multi-component complexes (other than salts and solvates) wherein the drug and at least one other component are present in stoichiometric or non-stoichiometric amounts. Complexes of this type include clathrates (drughost inclusion complexes) and co-crystals. The latter are typically defined as crystalline complexes of neutral molecular constituents which are bound together through non-covalent interactions, but could also be a complex of a neutral molecule with a salt. Co-crystals may be prepared by melt crystallization, by recrystallization from solvents, or by physically grinding the components together - see O. Almarsson and M. J. Zaworotko, Chem. Commun., 17, 1889- 1896 (2004). For a general review of multi-component complexes, see Haleblian, J. Pharm. Sci., 64 (8), 1269-1288 (1975).

[0268] Prodrugs

[0269] Also included within the scope of the invention are prodrugs of the compounds of the invention. A compound of the invention may be administered in the form of a prodrug. Thus, certain derivatives of a compound of the invention which may have little or no pharmacological activity themselves may, when administered into or onto the body, be converted into a compound of the invention having the desired activity, for example by hydrolytic cleavage, particularly hydrolytic cleavage promoted by an esterase or peptidase enzyme. Such derivatives are referred to as ‘prodrugs’. Further information on the use of prodrugs may be found in ‘The Expanding Role of Prodrugs in Contemporary Drug Design and Development, Nature Reviews Drug Discovery, 17, 559-587 (2018) (J. Rautio et al.).

[0270] Prodrugs in accordance with the invention may, for example, be produced by replacing appropriate functionalities present in compounds of the invention with certain moieties known to those skilled in the art as ‘pro-moieties’ as described, for example, in ‘Design of Prodrugs’ by H. Bundgaard (Elsevier, 1985).

[0271] Thus, a prodrug in accordance with the invention may be (a) an ester or amide derivative of a carboxylic acid when present in a compound of the invention; (b) an ester, carbonate, carbamate, phosphate or ether derivative of a hydroxyl group when present in a compound of the invention; (c) an amide, imine, carbamate or amine derivative of an amino group when present in a compound of the invention; (d) a thioester, thiocarbonate, thiocarbamate or sulfide derivatives of a thiol group when present in a compound of the invention; or (e) an oxime or imine derivative of a carbonyl group when present in a compound of the invention. Some specific examples of prodrugs in accordance with the invention include:

[0272] (i) when a compound of the invention contains a carboxylic acid functionality (- COOH), an ester thereof, such as a compound wherein the hydrogen of the carboxylic acid functionality of the compound is replaced by Ci-C8alkyl (e.g., ethyl) or (Ci-C8alkyl)C(=O)OCH2- (e.g., ‘BuC(=O)OCH2-);

[0273] (ii) when a compound of the invention contains an alcohol functionality (-OH), an ester thereof, such as a compound wherein the hydrogen of the alcohol functionality of the compound is replaced by -CO(Ci-C8alkyl) (e.g., methylcarbonyl) or the alcohol is esterified with an amino acid;

[0274] (iii) when a compound of the invention contains an alcohol functionality (-OH), an ether thereof, such as a compound wherein the hydrogen of the alcohol functionality of the compound is replaced by (Ci-C8alkyl)C(=O)OCH2- or -CH2OP(=Q)(OH)2;

[0275] (iv) when a compound of the invention contains an alcohol functionality (-OH), a phosphate thereof, such as a compound wherein the hydrogen of the alcohol functionality of the compound is replaced by -P(=O)(OH)2or-P(=0)(O Na+)2or-P(=0)(0 )2Ca2+;

[0276] (v) when a compound of the invention contains a primary or secondary amino functionality (-NH2or -NHR where R H), an amide thereof, for example, a compound wherein, as the case may be, one or both hydrogens of the amino functionality of the compound is / are replaced by (Ci-Cw)alkanoyl, -COCH2NH2or the amino group is derivatized with an amino acid;

[0277] (vi) when a compound of the invention contains a primary or secondary amino functionality (-NH2or -NHR where R H), an amine thereof, for example, a compound wherein, as the case may be, one or both hydrogens of the amino functionality of the compound is / are replaced by -CH2OP(=O)(OH)2.

[0278] Certain compounds of the invention may themselves act as prodrugs of other compounds the invention. It is also possible for two compounds of the invention to be joined together in the form of a prodrug. In certain circumstances, a prodrug of a compound of the invention may be created by internally linking two functional groups in a compound of the invention, for instance by forming a lactone.

[0279] Metabolites

[0280] Also included within the scope of the invention are active metabolites of compounds of Formula I (including prodrugs) or their pharmaceutically acceptable salts, that is, compounds formed in vivo upon administration of the drug, often by oxidation or dealkylation. Some examples of metabolites in accordance with the invention include:

[0281] (i) where the compound of Formula I or its pharmaceutically acceptable salt contains a methyl group, a hydroxymethyl derivative thereof (-CH3-> -CH2OH) and

[0282] (ii) where the compound of Formula I or its pharmaceutically acceptable salt contains an alkoxy group, a hydroxy derivative thereof (-OR -> -OH). Also included within the scope of the invention are active metabolites of compounds of the invention, that is, compounds formed in vivo upon administration of the drug, often by oxidation or dealkylation. Some examples of metabolites in accordance with the invention include, but are not limited to,

[0283] (i) where the compound of the invention contains an alkyl group, a hydroxyalkyl derivative thereof (-CH -> -COH):

[0284] (ii) where the compound of the invention contains an alkoxy group, a hydroxy derivative thereof (-OR -> -OH);

[0285] (iii) where the compound of the invention contains a tertiary amino group, a secondary amino derivative thereof (-NRR -> -NHR or-NHR);

[0286] (iv) where the compound of the invention contains a secondary amino group, a primary derivative thereof (-NHR-> -NH2);

[0287] (v) where the compound of the invention contains a phenyl moiety, a phenol derivative thereof (-Ph -> -PhOH);

[0288] (vi) where the compound of the invention contains an amide group, a carboxylic acid derivative thereof (-CONH2-> COOH); and

[0289] (vii) where the compound contains a hydroxy or carboxylic acid group, the compound may be metabolized by conjugation, for example with glucuronic acid to form a glucuronide. Other routes of conjugative metabolism exist. These pathways are frequently known as Phase 2 metabolism and include, for example, sulfation or acetylation. Other functional groups, such as NH groups, may also be subject to conjugation.

[0290] Solid form

[0291] The compounds of the invention may exist in a continuum of solid states ranging from fully amorphous to fully crystalline. The term ‘amorphous’ refers to a state in which the material lacks long range order at the molecular level and, depending upon temperature, may exhibit the physical properties of a solid or a liquid. Typically, such materials do not give distinctive X-ray diffraction patterns and, while exhibiting the properties of a solid, are more formally described as a liquid. Upon heating, a change from solid to liquid properties occurs which is characterized by a change of state, typically second order (‘glass transition’). The term ‘crystalline’ refers to a solid phase in which the material has a regular ordered internal structure at the molecular level and gives a distinctive X-ray diffraction pattern with defined peaks. Such materials when heated sufficiently will also exhibit the properties of a liquid, but the change from solid to liquid is characterized by a phase change, typically first order (‘melting point’).

[0292] The compounds of the invention may also exist in a mesomorphic state (mesophase or liquid crystal) when subjected to suitable conditions. The mesomorphic state is intermediate between the true crystalline state and the true liquid state (either melt or solution) and consists of two dimensional order on the molecular level. Mesomorphism arising as the result of a change in temperature is described as ‘thermotropic’ and that resulting from the addition of a second component, such as water or another solvent, is described as ‘lyotropic’. Compounds that have the potential to form lyotropic mesophases are described as ‘amphiphilic’ and consist of molecules which possess an ionic (such as -COO Na+, -COO K+, or -SO3Na+) or non-ionic (such as -N N+(CH3)3) polar head group. For more information, see Crystals and the Polarizing Microscope by N. H. Hartshorne and A. Stuart, 4thEdition (Edward Arnold, 1970).

[0293] Certain compounds of the present invention may exist in more than one crystal form (generally referred to as “polymorphs”). Polymorphs may be prepared by crystallization under various conditions, for example, using different solvents or different solvent mixtures for recrystallization; crystallization at different temperatures; and / or various modes of cooling, ranging from very fast to very slow cooling during crystallization. Polymorphs may also be obtained by heating or melting the compound of the present invention followed by gradual or fast cooling. The presence of polymorphs may be determined by solid probe NMR spectroscopy, IR spectroscopy, differential scanning calorimetry, powder X-ray diffraction or such other techniques.

[0294] In general the compounds of this invention can be made by processes which include processes analogous to those known in the chemical arts, particularly in light of the description contained herein. Certain processes for the manufacture of the compounds of this invention are provided as further features of the invention and are illustrated by the following reaction schemes. Other processes may be described in the experimental section. Specific synthetic schemes for preparation of the compounds of Formula I or their pharmaceutically acceptable salts are outlined below. Note that tetrazoles are generally a high-energy functional group and care should be taken in the synthesis and handling of tetrazole-containing molecules.

[0295] Co-administration

[0296] The compounds of the invention may be used alone, or in combination with one or more other therapeutic agents. The invention provides any of the uses, methods or compositions as defined herein wherein the compound of the invention, or pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, is used in combination with one or more other therapeutic agent discussed herein.

[0297] The administration of two or more compounds “in combination” means that all of the compounds are administered closely enough in time to affect treatment of the subject. The two or more compounds may be administered simultaneously or sequentially, via the same or different routes of administration, on same or different administration schedules and with or without specific time limits depending on the treatment regimen. Additionally, simultaneous administration may be carried out by mixing the compounds prior to administration or by administering the compounds at the same point in time but as separate dosage forms at the same or different site of administration. Examples of “in combination” include, but are not limited to, “concurrent administration,” “co-administration,” “simultaneous administration,” “sequential administration” and “administered simultaneously”. A compound of the invention and the one or more other therapeutic agents may be administered as a fixed or non-fixed combination of the active ingredients. The term "fixed combination" means a compound of the invention, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, and the one or more therapeutic agents, are both administered to a subject simultaneously in a single composition or dosage. The term "non-fixed combination" means that a compound of the invention, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, and the one or more therapeutic agents are formulated as separate compositions or dosages such that they may be administered to a subject in need thereof simultaneously or at different times with variable intervening time limits, wherein such administration provides effective levels of the two or more compounds in the body of the subject.

[0298] The combination agents are administered to a patient (e.g. a mammal or human) in a therapeutically effective amount. By "therapeutically effective amount" it is meant an amount of a compound of the present invention that, when administered alone or in combination with an additional therapeutic agent to a mammal, is effective to treat the desired disease / disorder / condition (e.g., T2DM or obesity).

[0299] In some embodiments, a compound of this invention may be co-administered with one or more other agents such as Orlistat, TZDs and other insulin-sensitizing agents, FGF21 analogs, Metformin, Omega-3-acid ethyl esters (e.g., Lovaza), Fibrates, HMG CoA-reductase Inhibitors, Ezetimibe, Probucol, Ursodeoxycholic acid, TGR5 agonists, FXR agonists, Vitamin E, Betaine, Pentoxifylline, CB1 antagonists, Carnitine, / V-acetylcysteine, Reduced glutathione, lorcaserin, the combination of naltrexone with buproprion, SGLT2 inhibitors (including dapagliflozin, canagliflozin, empagliflozin, tofogliflozin, ertugliflozin, ASP-1941 , THR1474, TS- 071 , ISIS388626 and LX4211 as well as those in WO2010023594), Phentermine, Topiramate, GLP-1 receptor agonists, GIP receptor agonists, GIP receptor inhibitors and / or antagonists, dual GLP-1 receptor / glucagon receptor agonists (e.g., OPK88003, MEDI0382, JNJ-64565111 , NN9277, Bl 456906), dual GLP-1 receptor / GIP receptor agonists [e.g., Tirzepatide (LY3298176), NN9423, NN9541 , HS-20094, SCO-094, VK2735, CT-388, GMA-106, CT-868, HRS9531], dual GLP-1 receptor / glucagon receptor agonists (e.g. DD-01 , PB-718, mazdutide, pemvidutide, pegapamodutide, survodutide, LM-008, IBI-362, AZD9550), dual GLP-1 receptor / GLP-2 receptor agonists (e.g. dapiglutide), dual GLP-1 receptor / amylin receptor agonists (e.g. amycretin), cagrilinitide / semaglutide, GLP-1 receptor agonist / GIP receptor antagonist (maridebart cafraglutide), dual GLP-1 receptor / FGF21 receptor agonists (e.g. HEC- 88473, Bl 3006337), triple agonists of the GLP-1 receptor / glucagon receptor / GIP receptor (e.g. retatrutide), triple agonists of the GLP-1 receptor / glucagon receptor / FGF21 receptor (e.g. DR10624), NPY2 receptor agonists (e.g. Bl 1820237), activin receptor type-2B modulators (e.g. bimagrumab), amylin receptor agonists, GPR75 modulators, delta-5 desaturase inhibitors, orexin 2 receptor modulators, Angiotensin-receptor blockers, an acetyl-CoA carboxylase (ACC) inhibitor, a ketohexokinase (KHK) inhibitor, ASK1 inhibitors, branched-chain alpha-keto acid dehydrogenase kinase inhibitors (BCKDK inhibitors), inhibitors of CCR2 and / or CCR5, PNPLA3 inhibitors, DGAT1 inhibitors, DGAT2 inhibitors, an FGF21 analog, FGF19 analogs, PPAR agonists, FXR agonists, AMPK activators [e.g., ETC-1002 (bempedoic acid)], SCD1 inhibitors or MPO inhibitors.

[0300] Exemplary GLP-1 receptor agonists include liraglutide, albiglutide, exenatide, lixisenatide, dulaglutide, semaglutide, danuglipron, orforglipron, lotiglipron, PF-06954522, HM15211 , LY3298176, Medi-0382, NN-9924, TTP-054, TTP-273, efpeglenatide, CT-996, ECC5004, XW004, XW014, MDR-001 , ZT002, KN-056, GL0034, GSBR-1290, noiiglutide, RGT- 075, TTP-273, HRS-7535, GMA-105, TG103, GZR-18, GX-G6, ecnoglutide, PB-119, QLG2065, beinaglutide, those described in WO2018109607, those described in WO2019239319 (PCT / IB2019 / 054867 filed June 11 , 2019), and those described in WO2019239371 (PCT / IB2019 / 054961 filed June 13, 2019).

[0301] Exemplary ACC inhibitors include 4-(4-[(1 -isopropyl-7-oxo-1 ,4,6,7-tetrahydro-1 'H- spiro[indazole-5,4'-piperidin]-1'-yl)carbonyl]-6-methoxypyridin-2-yl)benzoic acid, gemcabene, and firsocostat (GS-0976) and phamaceutally acceptable salts thereof.

[0302] Exemplary FXR agonists include tropifexor (2-[(1 R,3R,5S)-3-({5-cyclopropyl-3-[2- (trifluoromethoxy)phenyl]-1 ,2-oxazol-4-yl}methoxy)-8-azabicyclo[3.2.1]octan-8-yl]-4-fluoro-1 ,3- benzothiazole-6-carboxylic acid), cilofexor (GS-9674), obeticholic acid, LY2562175, Met409, TERN-101 and EDP-305 and pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof.

[0303] Exemplary KHK inhibitors include [(1 R,5S,6R)-3-{2-[(2S)-2-methylazetidin-1-yl]-6- (trifluoromethyl)pyrimidin-4-yl}-3-azabicyclo[3.1 ,0]hex-6-yl]acetic acid and pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof.

[0304] Exemplary DGAT2 inhibitors include (S)-2-(5-((3-ethoxypyridin-2-yl)oxy)pyridin-3-yl)-N- (tetrahydrofuran-3-yl)pyrimidine-5-carboxamide [including its crystalline solid forms (Form 1 and Form 2)]. See U.S. Patent No. 10,071 ,992.

[0305] Some exemplary BCKDK inhibitors include those described in US Patent Nos. 11542270 and 11059833, including the following:

[0306] 5-(5-chloro-4-fluoro 3-methylthiophen-2-yl)-1 / - / -tetrazole;

[0307] 5-(5-chloro-3-difluoromethylthiophen-2-yl)-1 / - / -tetrazole;

[0308] 5-(5-fluoro-3-methylthiophen-2-yl)-1 / - / -tetrazole;

[0309] 5-(5-chloro-3-methylthiophen-2-yl)-1 / - / -tetrazole;

[0310] 5-(3,5-dichlorothiophen-2-yl)-1 / - / -tetrazole;

[0311] 5-(4-bromo-3-methylthiophen-2-yl)-1 / - / -tetrazole;

[0312] 5-(4-bromo-3-ethylthiophen-2-yl)-1 / - / -tetrazole;

[0313] 5-(4-chloro-3-ethylthiophen-2-yl)-1 / - / -tetrazole;

[0314] 3-chloro-5-fluorothieno[3,2-b]thiophene-2-carboxylic acid;

[0315] 3-bromo-5-fluorothieno[3,2- b]thiophene-2-carboxylic acid;

[0316] 3-(difluoromethyl)-5-fluorothieno[3,2-b]thiophene-2-carboxylic acid; 5,6-difluorothieno[3,2-b]thiophene-2-carboxylic acid; and 3,5-difluorothieno[3,2-b]thiophene-2-carboxylic acid; or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.

[0317] Some additional exemplary BCKDK inhibitors include those described in US Patent Application 18 / 060,027, filed November 30, 2022, including the following:

[0318] 6-fluoro-3-(2,4,6-trifluoro-3-methoxyphenyl)-1-benzothiophene-2-carboxylic acid; 6-fluoro-3-(2,4,5-trifluoro-3-methoxyphenyl)-1-benzothiophene-2-carboxylic acid; 6-chloro-3-(2,4,5-trifluoro-3-methylphenyl)-1-benzothiophene-2-carboxylic acid; 6-chloro-3-(2,4-difluoro-3-methoxyphenyl)-1-benzothiophene-2-carboxylic acid; 3-(6-chloro-2,4-difluoro-3-methoxyphenyl)-6-fluoro-1 -benzothiophene-2-carboxylic acid; 3-(6-chloro-2,4-difluoro-3-methoxyphenyl)-6-fluoro-1 -benzothiophene-2-carboxylic acid, ATROP-2;

[0319] 3-(3-chloro-2,4,5-trifluorophenyl)-6-fluoro-1 -benzothiophene-2-carboxylic acid; 3-(4-chloro-2,6-difluoro-3-methoxyphenyl)-6-fluoro-1 -benzothiophene-2-carboxylic acid; 6-chloro-3-(2,4,6-trifluoro-3-methoxyphenyl)-1-benzothiophene-2-carboxylic acid; 6-chloro-3-(3-ethyl-2,4,5-trifluorophenyl)-1-benzothiophene-2-carboxylic acid; or ammonium 3-(3-ethyl-2,4,5-trifluorophenyl)-6-fluoro-1-benzothiophene-2-carboxylate; or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.

[0320] In some embodiments, a compound of this invention may be co-administered with one or more anti-diabetic agents. Suitable anti-diabetic agents include insulin, metformin, GLP-1 receptor agonists (described herein above), an acetyl-CoA carboxylase (ACC) inhibitor (described herein above), SGLT2 inhibitors (described herein above), monoacylglycerol O- acyltransferase inhibitors, phosphodiesterase (PDE)-10 inhibitors, AMPK activators [e.g., ETC- 1002 (bempedoic acid)], sulfonylureas (e.g., acetohexamide, chlorpropamide, diabinese, glibenclamide, glipizide, glyburide, glimepiride, gliclazide, glipentide, gliquidone, glisolamide, tolazamide, and tolbutamide), meglitinides, a-amylase inhibitors (e.g., tendamistat, trestatin and AL-3688), an a-glucoside hydrolase inhibitor (e.g., acarbose), a-glucosidase inhibitors (e.g., adiposine, camiglibose, emiglitate, miglitol, voglibose, pradimicin-Q, and salbostatin), PPARy agonists (e.g., balaglitazone, ciglitazone, darglitazone, englitazone, isaglitazone, pioglitazone and rosiglitazone), PPAR a / y agonists (e.g., CLX-0940, GW-1536, GW-1929, GW-2433, KRP- 297, L-796449, LR-90, MK-0767 and SB-219994), protein tyrosine phosphatase-1 B (PTP-1 B) inhibitors [e.g., trodusquemine, hyrtiosal extract, and compounds disclosed by Zhang, S. et al., Drug Discovery Today, 12(9 / 10), 373-381 (2007)], SIRT-1 activators (e.g., resveratrol, GSK2245840 or GSK184072), dipeptidyl peptidase IV (DPP-IV) inhibitors (e.g., those in W02005116014, sitagliptin, vildagliptin, alogliptin, dutogliptin, linagliptin and saxagliptin), insulin secretagogues, fatty acid oxidation inhibitors, A2 antagonists, c-jun amino-terminal kinase (JNK) inhibitors, glucokinase activators (GKa) such as those described in WO2010103437, WO2010103438, WO2010013161 , WG2007122482, TTP-399, TTP-355, TTP-547, AZD1656, ARRY403, MK-0599, TAK-329, AZD5658 or GKM-001 , insulin, insulin mimetics, glycogen phosphorylase inhibitors (e.g., GSK1362885), VPAC2 receptor agonists, glucagon receptor modulators such as those described in Demong, D.E. et al., Annual Reports in Medicinal Chemistry 2008, 43, 119-137, GPR119 modulators, particularly agonists, such as those described in WO2010140092, WO2010128425, WG2010128414, WO2010106457, Jones, R.M. et al., Annual Reports in Medicinal Chemistry 2009, 44, 149-170 (e.g., MBX-2982,

[0321] GSK1292263, APD597 and PSN821), FGF21 derivatives or analogs such as those described in Kharitonenkov, A. et al., Current Opinion in Investigational Drugs 2009, 10(4)359-364, TGR5 (also termed GPBAR1) receptor modulators, particularly agonists, such as those described in Zhong, M., Current Topics in Medicinal Chemistry, 2010, 10(4), 386-396 and INT777, GPR40 agonists, such as those described in Medina, J.C., Annual Reports in Medicinal Chemistry, 2008, 43, 75-85, including but not limited to TAK-875, GPR120 modulators, particularly agonists, high-affinity nicotinic acid receptor (HM74A) activators, and SGLT1 inhibitors, such as GSK1614235. A further representative listing of anti-diabetic agents that can be combined with the compounds of the present invention can be found, for example, at page 28, line 35 through page 30, line 19 of WO2011005611 .

[0322] Other antidiabetic agents could include inhibitors or modulators of carnitine palmitoyl transferase enzymes, inhibitors of fructose 1 ,6-diphosphatase, inhibitors of aldose reductase, mineralocorticoid receptor inhibitors, inhibitors of TORC2, inhibitors of CCR2 and / or CCR5, inhibitors of PKC isoforms (e.g., PKCa, PKCp, PKCy), inhibitors of fatty acid synthetase, inhibitors of serine palmitoyl transferase, modulators of GPR81 , GPR39, GPR43, GPR41 , GPR105, Kv1.3, retinol binding protein 4, glucocorticoid receptor, somatostain receptors (e.g., SSTR1 , SSTR2, SSTR3 and SSTR5), inhibitors or modulators of PDHK2 or PDHK4, inhibitors of MAP4K4, modulators of IL1 family including ILI beta, and modulators of RXRalpha. In addition suitable anti-diabetic agents include mechanisms listed by Carpino, P.A., Goodwin, B. Expert Opin. Ther. Pat., 2010, 20(12), 1627-51.

[0323] The compounds of the present invention may be co-administered with anti-heart failure agents such as ACE inhibitors (e.g., captopril, enalapril, fosinopril, lisinopril, perindopril, quinapril, ramipril, trandolapril), Angiotensin II receptor blockers (e.g., candesartan, losartan, valsartan), Angiotensin-receptor neprilysin inhibitors (sacubitril / valsartan), lfchannel blocker Ivabradine, Beta-Adrenergic blocking agents (e.g., bisoprolol, metoprolol succinate, carvedilol), Aldosterone antagonists (e.g., spironolactone, eplerenone), hydralazine and isosorbide dinitrate, diuretics (e.g., furosemide, bumetanide, torsemide, chlorothiazide, amiloride, hydrochlorothiazide, Indapamide, Metolazone, Triamterene), or digoxin.

[0324] The compounds of the present invention may also be co-administered with cholesterol or lipid lowering agents including the following exemplary agents: HMG CoA reductase inhibitors (e.g., pravastatin, pitavastatin, lovastatin, atorvastatin, simvastatin, fluvastatin, NK- 104 (a.k.a. itavastatin, or nisvastatin or nisbastatin) and ZD-4522 (a.k.a. rosuvastatin, or atavastatin or visastatin); squalene synthetase inhibitors; fibrates (e.g., gemfibrozil, pemafibrate, fenofibrate, clofibrate); bile acid sequestrants (such as questran, colestipol, colesevelam); ACAT inhibitors; MTP inhibitors; lipooxygenase inhibitors; cholesterol absorption inhibitors (e.g., ezetimibe); nicotinic acid agents (e.g., niacin, niacor, slo-niacin); omega-3 fatty acids (e.g., epanova, fish oil, eicosapentaenoic acid); cholesteryl ester transfer protein inhibitors (e.g., obicetrapib) and PCSK9 modulators [e.g., alirocumab, evolocumab, bococizumab, ALN- PCS (inclisiran)].

[0325] The compounds of the present invention may also be used in combination with antihypertensive agents and such antihypertensive activity is readily determined by those skilled in the art according to standard assays (e.g., blood pressure measurements). Examples of suitable anti-hypertensive agents include: alpha-adrenergic blockers; beta-adrenergic blockers; calcium channel blockers (e.g., diltiazem, verapamil, nifedipine and amlodipine); vasodilators (e.g., hydralazine), diruetics (e.g., chlorothiazide, hydrochlorothiazide, flumethiazide, hydroflumethiazide, bendroflumethiazide, methylchlorothiazide, trichloromethiazide, polythiazide, benzthiazide, ethacrynic acid tricrynafen, chlorthalidone, torsemide, furosemide, musolimine, bumetanide, triamtrenene, amiloride, spironolactone); renin inhibitors; ACE inhibitors (e.g., captopril, zofenopril, fosinopril, enalapril, ceranopril, cilazopril, delapril, pentopril, quinapril, ramipril, lisinopril); AT-1 receptor antagonists (e.g., losartan, irbesartan, valsartan); ET receptor antagonists (e.g., sitaxsentan, atrsentan and compounds disclosed in U.S. Patent Nos. 5,612,359 and 6,043,265); Dual ET / AII antagonist (e.g., compounds disclosed in WO 00 / 01389); neutral endopeptidase (NEP) inhibitors; vasopepsidase inhibitors (dual NEP-ACE inhibitors) (e.g., gemopatrilat and nitrates). An exemplary antianginal agent is ivabradine.

[0326] Examples of suitable calcium channel blockers (L-type or T-type) include diltiazem, verapamil, nifedipine and amlodipine and mybefradil.

[0327] Examples of suitable cardiac glycosides include digitalis and ouabain.

[0328] In one embodiment, a compound of invention may be co-administered with one or more diuretics. Examples of suitable diuretics include (a) loop diuretics such as furosemide (such as LASIX™), torsemide (such as DEMADEX™), bemetanide (such as BUMEX™), and ethacrynic acid (such as EDECRIN™); (b) thiazide-type diuretics such as chlorothiazide (such as DIURIL™, ESIDRIX™ or HYDRODIURIL™), hydrochlorothiazide (such as MICROZIDE™ or ORETIC™), benzthiazide, hydroflumethiazide (such as SALURON™), bendroflumethiazide, methychlorthiazide, polythiazide, trichlormethiazide, and indapamide (such as LOZOL™); (c) phthalimidine-type diuretics such as chlorthalidone (such as HYGROTON™), and metolazone (such as ZAROXOLYN™); (d) quinazoline-type diuretics such as quinethazone; and (e) potassium-sparing diuretics such as triamterene (such as DYRENIUM™), and amiloride (such as MIDAMOR™ or MODURETIC™). In another embodiment, a compound of the invention may be co-administered with a loop diuretic. In still another embodiment, the loop diuretic is selected from furosemide and torsemide. In still another embodiment, one or more compounds of Formula I or their pharmaceutically acceptable salts may be co-administered with furosemide. In still another embodiment, one or more compounds of Formula I or their pharmaceutically acceptable salts may be co-administered with torsemide which may optionally be a controlled or modified release form of torsemide.

[0329] In another embodiment, a compound of the invention may be co-administered with a thiazide-type diuretic. In still another embodiment, the thiazide-type diuretic is selected from the group consisting of chlorothiazide and hydrochlorothiazide. In still another embodiment, one or more compounds of Formula I or their pharmaceutically acceptable salts may be coadministered with chlorothiazide. In still another embodiment, one or more compounds of Formula I or their pharmaceutically acceptable salts may be co-administered with hydrochlorothiazide.

[0330] In another embodiment, one or more compounds of Formula I or their pharmaceutically acceptable salts may be co-administered with a phthalimidine-type diuretic. In still another embodiment, the phthalimidine-type diuretic is chlorthalidone.

[0331] Examples of suitable mineralocorticoid receptor antagonists include sprionolactone and eplerenone.

[0332] Examples of suitable phosphodiesterase inhibitors include: PDE III inhibitors (such as cilostazol); and PDE V inhibitors (such as sildenafil).

[0333] Those skilled in the art will recognize that the compounds of this invention may also be used in conjunction with other cardiovascular or cerebrovascular treatments including Percutaneous Coronary Intervention (PCI), stenting, drug-eluting stents, stem cell therapy and medical devices such as implanted pacemakers, defibrillators, or cardiac resynchronization therapy.

[0334] Particularly when provided as a single dosage unit, the potential exists for a chemical interaction between the combined active ingredients. For this reason, when a compound of this invention and a second therapeutic agent are combined in a single dosage unit they may be formulated such that although the active ingredients are combined in a single dosage unit, the physical contact between the active ingredients is minimized (that is, reduced). For example, one active ingredient may be enteric-coated. By enteric-coating one of the active ingredients, it is possible not only to minimize the contact between the combined active ingredients, but also, it is possible to control the release of one of these components in the gastrointestinal tract such that one of these components is not released in the stomach but rather is released in the intestines. One of the active ingredients may also be coated with a material that effects a sustained release throughout the gastrointestinal tract and also serves to minimize physical contact between the combined active ingredients. Furthermore, the sustained-released component can be additionally enteric-coated such that the release of this component occurs only in the intestine. Still another approach would involve the formulation of a combination product in which the one component is coated with a sustained and / or enteric-release polymer, and the other component is also coated with a polymer such as a low viscosity grade of hydroxypropyl methylcellulose (HPMC) or other appropriate materials as known in the art, in order to further separate the active components. The polymer coating serves to form an additional barrier to interaction with the other component.

[0335] These as well as other ways of minimizing contact between the components of combination products of the present invention, whether administered in a single dosage form or administered in separate forms but at the same time by the same manner, will be readily apparent to those skilled in the art, once armed with the present disclosure.

[0336] Another approach may involve the formulation of a combination product in which both active components are combined with a material that effects a sustained release throughout the gastrointestinal tract of both active ingredients.

[0337] In some embodiments of combination therapy treatment, both the compounds of this invention and the other drug therapies are administered to patients such as mammals (e.g., humans, male or female) by conventional methods.

[0338] Kits

[0339] Another aspect of the invention provides kits comprising the compound of the invention or pharmaceutical compositions comprising the compound of the invention. A kit may include, in addition to the compound of the invention or pharmaceutical composition thereof, diagnostic or therapeutic agents. A kit may also include instructions for use in a diagnostic or therapeutic method. In some embodiments, the kit includes the compound or a pharmaceutical composition thereof and a diagnostic agent. In other embodiments, the kit includes the compound or a pharmaceutical composition thereof and one or more therapeutic agents as described in the coadministration section hereinabove.

[0340] In yet another embodiment, the invention comprises kits that are suitable for use in performing the methods of treatment described herein. In one embodiment, the kit contains a first dosage form comprising one or more of the compounds of the invention in quantities sufficient to carry out the methods of the invention. In another embodiment, the kit comprises one or more compounds of the invention in quantities sufficient to carry out the methods of the invention and a container for the dosage and a container for the dosage.

[0341] Synthesis

[0342] Compounds of the present invention may be synthesized by synthetic routes that include processes analogous to those well-known in the chemical arts, particularly in light of the description contained herein. The starting materials are generally available from commercial sources or may be prepared using methods well known to those skilled in the art. Many of the compounds used herein are related to, or may be derived from, compounds in which one or more of the scientific interest or commercial need has occurred. Accordingly, such compounds may be one or more of 1) commercially available; 2) reported in the literature or 3) prepared from other commonly available substances by one skilled in the art using materials which have been reported in the literature.

[0343] For illustrative purposes, the reaction schemes depicted below provide potential routes for synthesizing the compounds of the present invention as well as key intermediates. For a more detailed description of the individual reaction steps, see the Examples section below. Those skilled in the art will appreciate that other synthetic routes may be used to synthesize the inventive compounds. Although specific starting materials and reagents are discussed below, other starting materials and reagents may be substituted to provide one or more of a variety of derivatives or reaction conditions. In addition, many of the compounds prepared by the methods described below may be further modified in light of this disclosure using conventional chemistry well known to those skilled in the art.

[0344] The skilled person will appreciate that the experimental conditions set forth in the schemes that follow are illustrative of suitable conditions for effecting the transformations shown, and that it may be necessary or desirable to vary the precise conditions employed for the preparation of compounds of the invention. It will be further appreciated that it may be necessary or desirable to carry out the transformations in a different order from that described in the schemes, or to modify one or more of the transformations, to provide the desired compound of the invention.

[0345] In the preparation of compounds of the invention it is noted that some of the preparation methods useful for the preparation of the compounds described herein may require protection of remote functionality (e.g., a primary amine, secondary amine, carboxyl, etc. in a precursor of a compound of the invention). The need for such protection will vary depending on the nature of the remote functionality and the conditions of the preparation methods. The need for such protection is readily determined by one skilled in the art. The use of such protection / deprotection methods is also within the skill in the art. For a general description of protecting groups and their use, see March’s Advanced Organic Chemistry: Reactions, Mechanisms, and Structure 8th Edition.

[0346] For example, if a compound contains a amine or carboxylic acid functionality, such functionality may interfere with reactions at other sites of the molecule if left unprotected. Accordingly, such functionalities may be protected by an appropriate protecting group (PG) which may be removed in a subsequent step. Suitable protecting groups for amine and carboxylic acid protection include those protecting groups commonly used in peptide synthesis (such as N-t-butoxycarbonyl (Boc), benzyloxycarbonyl (Cbz), and 9- fluorenylmethylenoxycarbonyl (Fmoc) for amines and lower alkyl or benzyl esters for carboxylic acids) which are generally not chemically reactive under the reaction conditions described and may typically be removed without chemically altering other functionality in a compound of the invention.

[0347] Reactions can be monitored according to any suitable method known in the art. For example, product formation can be monitored by spectroscopic means, such as nuclear magnetic resonance spectroscopy (e.g.,1H or13C), infrared spectroscopy, spectrophotometry (e.g., UV-visible), mass spectrometry, or by chromatographic methods such as high- performance liquid chromatography (HPLC) or thin-layer chromatography (TLC).

[0348] Compounds of Formula I, salts and intermediates thereof may be prepared according to the following reaction schemes and accompanying discussion. The reaction schemes described below are intended to provide a general description of the methodology employed in the preparation of the compounds of the present invention. Some of the compounds of the present invention contain a single chiral center with stereochemical designation (R or S) and others will contain two separate chiral centers with stereochemical designation (R or S). It will be apparent to one skilled in the art that most of the synthetic transformations can be conducted in a similar manner whether the materials are enantioenriched or racemic. Moreover, the resolution to the desired optically active material may take place at any desired point in the sequence using well known methods such as described herein and in the chemistry literature.

[0349] Unless otherwise indicated, in the reaction schemes that follow, variables R1, R2, R3, R3a, R3b, R7, R8, Rcy, RA, R, R’, R”, L1, L2, T1, T2, T3, T4, T5, T6, T7, T8, T9, T10, T11, T12, A1, n1 , t1 , t2, and t3 and structural Formula I (including, e.g., Formula la) in the reaction schemes and discussion that follow are as defined herein or consistent with those described in the claims and embodiments herein. For each of the variables (including those are not in the claims or embodiments), its meaning remains the same as initially described unless otherwise indicated in a later occurrence. In general, the compounds of this invention may be made by processes which include processes analogous to those known in the chemical arts, particularly in light of the description contained herein. Certain processes for the manufacture of the compounds of this invention and intermediates thereof are provided as further features of the invention and are illustrated by the following reaction schemes. Other processes are described in the experimental section. The schemes and examples provided herein (including the corresponding description) are for illustration only, and not intended to limit the scope of the present invention.

[0350] In general, the compounds of this invention may be made by processes described herein and by analogous processes known to those skilled in the art. Certain processes for the manufacture of the compounds of this invention are described in the following reaction schemes. Other processes are described in the experimental section. The schemes and examples provided herein (including the corresponding description) are for illustration only. One skilled in the art will recognize that intermediates and compounds of Formula I prepared according to the following schemes may be isolated as salts or non-salts depending on the conditions of the reaction, isolation, or purification. One skilled in the art will also recognize that in some instances, additional synthetic steps may be required to protect and deprotect certain functional groups present within the synthetic sequence. One skilled in the art will further recognize that in other instances, certain functional groups may be carried through the synthetic sequences described and then may be transformed into alternate substituents present in compounds of Formula I.

[0351] Scheme 1 refers to the preparation of compounds of Formula I. Compounds of Formula I can be prepared from an amide bond forming reaction between carboxylic acid intermediate 1- 1 and amine intermediate 1 -2. Amide bond forming reactions of this type can be achieved by combining a carboxylic acid (such as carboxylic acid structure 1-1) with an amine (such as amine of structure 1 -2) in the presence of an activating reagent (such as 2,4,6-tripropyl- 1 ,3,5,2,4,6-trioxatriphosphorinane-2,4,6-trioxide or 1 -ethyl-3-(3-dimethylaminopropyl)- carbodiimide and 1 -hydroxybenzotriazole) and a base (such as 1-methyl imidazole or N,N- diisopropylethylamine) in a suitable solvent (such as dichloromethane). One skilled in the art will recognize that numerous alternate conditions may be selected for the formation of an amide (such as a compound of Formula I) from a carboxylic acid (such as a carboxylic acid of structure 1-1) and an amine (such as an amine of structure 1-2). (See e.g. Chem. Rev. 2011 , 111 , 6557-6602). If R3contains an ester protecting group, it can be deprotected using appropriate conditions such as trifluoroacetic acid (if ester is f-butyl) to afford compounds with a carboxylic acid in R3, which are also examples of compounds of Formula I. Further functional group conversions are also possible. For example, conversion of an acid (RAis -C(=O)-OH) to an amide (-C(=O)-N(R7)(R8)) can be achieved by a variety of methods which are well established in the art. These amides are also compounds of Formula 1.

[0352] Scheme 1

[0353] Scheme 2 refers to the preparation of compounds of structure 2-5 (which are compounds of Formula I wherein L2is NH) from amino acids of structure 2-1. Compounds of structure 2-1 can be reacted with isocyanates of structure 2-2 in the presence of a base (such as A / , / V-diisopropylethylamine or N-methyl morpholine) in a suitable solvent (such as tetrahydrofuran) to afford ureas of structure 2-4. Alternatively, ureas of structure 2-4 can be obtained by reacting amines of structure 2-3 with a suitable reactant (such as triphosgene or 1 ,1 '-carbonyldiimidazole) in the presence of a base (such as / V-methyl morpholine) to form an intermediate and subsequently reacting the resulting intermediate with a compound of structure 2-1. One skilled in the art will recognize that numerous alternate conditions may be selected for the formation of ureas (such as ureas of structure 2-4). (See e.g. J. Med. Chem. 2020, 63, 2751-2788). Compounds of formula 2-5, can be prepared from an amide bond forming reaction between carboxylic acid intermediate 2-4 and amine intermediate 1-2, as described previously for Scheme 1 . If R3contains an ester protecting group, it can be deprotected using appropriate conditions to afford compounds with a carboxylic acid in R3, which are also examples of compounds of structure 2-5. For example, a compound of structure 2-5 wherein R3contains a methyl ester, can be converted to a carboxylic acid upon treatment with potassium trimethylsilanolate in tetrahydrofuran or with lithium hydroxide in a solvent mixture consisting of tetrahydrofuran and water. For another example, a compound of structure 2-5 wherein R3contains a te / Y-butyl ester can be converted to a carboxylic acid upon treatment with an acid such as trifluoroacetic acid.

[0354] Scheme 2

[0355]

[0356] Scheme 3 refers to preparation of intermediates of structure 2-4 from amino esters of structure 3-1 wherein R is alkyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl, benzyl, or the like. Compounds of structure 2-4 are also compounds of Formula I. Amino esters of structure 3-1 can be reacted with isocyanates of structure 2-2 in the presence of a base (such as A / , / V-diisopropylethylamine) in a suitable solvent (such as tetra hydro furan) to afford ureas of structure 3-2. Alternatively, ureas of structure 3-2 can be obtained by reacting amines of structure 2-3 with a suitable reactant (such as triphosgene or 1 ,1 '-carbonyldiimidazole) to form an intermediate and subsequently reacting the resulting intermediate with an amino ester of structure 3-1 . The ester in the ureas of structure 3-2 can be converted to a carboxylic acid 2-4 via methods known in the art. The conditions selected for conversion of an ester to an acid are dependent on the type of ester present. For example, a compound of structure 3-2 wherein R is methyl (i.e. having a methyl ester functional group) can be converted to a carboxylic acid upon treatment with lithium hydroxide in a solvent mixture consisting of tetrahydrofuran and water. Alternatively, a compound of structure 3-2 wherein R is f-butyl (i.e. having a te / Y-butyl ester functional group) can be converted to a carboxylic acid upon treatment with an acid such as trifluoroacetic acid.

[0357] Scheme 3

[0358] Scheme 4 refers to another preparation of compounds of structure 2-5 (which are compounds of Formula I wherein L2is NH) from nitrogen-protected amino acids of structure 4-1. A carboxylic acid of structure 4-1 can be reacted with an amine of structure 1 -2 via amide bond forming conditions as described in Scheme 1 to form an amide. The remaining tert- butyloxycarbonyl protecting group in the resulting amide can be removed upon treatment with an acid such as trifluoroacetic acid to afford the amine intermediate of structure 4-2. The intermediate of structure 4-2 can be coupled with an isocyanate of structure 2-2 or an amine of structure 2-3 via urea-forming conditions as described previously in Schemes 2 and 3 to afford compounds of structure 2-5. Compounds of structure 2-5 are examples of compounds of Formula 1 , in which L2is N-H. If R3contains an ester protecting group, it can be deprotected using appropriate conditions to afford compounds with a carboxylic acid in R3, which are also examples of compounds of structure 2-5 which are also examples of Formula I. For example, a compound of structure 2-5 for which R3contains a methyl ester, can be converted to a carboxylic acid upon treatment with potassium trimethylsilanolate in tetrahydrofuran or with lithium hydroxide in a solvent mixture consisting of tetra hydrofuran and water. Alternatively, a compound of structure 2-5 for which R3contains a te / Y-butyl ester, can be converted to a carboxylic acid upon treatment with an acid such as trifluoroacetic acid. One skilled in the art would recognize that an alternative protecting group from the Boc shown in structure 4-1 may also be used. For example, fluorenylmethyloxycarbonyl (Fmoc), another protecting group, could be used in place of the Boc group of structure 4-1 . After amidation, the Fmoc can be subsequently removed by conditions known to one skilled in the art, such as stirring with piperidine in a solvent such as / V, / V-dimethylformamide.

[0359] Scheme 4

[0360] Scheme 5 refers to the preparation of compounds of structure 5-3 (which are compounds of Formula I wherein L2is C(RL2)2). Carboxylic acids of structure 5-1 can be coupled with compounds of structure 2-1 to form amides of structure 5-2. Coupling with amino acids of structure 2-1 is well exemplified in the literature and there are many conditions known to one skilled in the art that can be used to effect this transformation, such as those in Scheme 1 . Acid 5-2 can be further elaborated as described in Scheme 1 to afford compounds of structure 5-3. Scheme 5

[0361] Scheme 6 details another approach to obtain compounds of structure 5-3 (which are compounds of Formula I wherein L2is C(RL2)2). Amino amide 4-2, which may contain a protecting group such as an ester as part of R3, can be reacted with carboxylic acids of structure 5-1 via an amidation reaction to form compounds 5-3. There are many conditions in the literature and known to one skilled in the art, that can be used to effect this transformation, such as those in Scheme 1 . If R3contains an ester protecting group, it can be deprotected using appropriate conditions such as trifluoroacetic acid (if ester is f-butyl) to afford carboxylic acids that are also compounds of structure 5-3.

[0362] Scheme 6

[0363] Scheme 7 refers to the preparation of carboxylic acids of structure 7-3 which are examples of compounds of structure 5-1 wherein t1 is 1 , L1is NH, and both RL2are H. A compound of structure 7-1 can be condensed with an aldehyde of structure 7-2 (wherein R’ is H, i.e. glyoxylic acid as the aldehyde of structure 7-2), followed by reduction with a suitable reducing agent (such as sodium cyanoborohydride to afford) to afford a compound of structure 7-3. One skilled in the art will recognize it may be possible to react an ester of structure 7-2 (wherein R’ is alkyl or the like) with a compound of structure 7-1 to obtain a compound of structure 7-3’. In this case, a suitable deprotection step can be employed to afford the acid of structure 7-3. For example, a compound of structure 7-3’ wherein R’ is methyl (i.e. having a methyl ester functional group) can be converted to a carboxylic acid upon treatment with lithium hydroxide in a solvent mixture consisting of tetrahydrofuran and water. For another example, a compound of structure 7-3’ wherein R’ is f-butyl (i.e. having a te / Y-butyl ester functional group) can be converted to a carboxylic acid upon treatment with an acid such as trifluoroacetic acid. Acid 7-3 can be elaborated to compounds of Formula I (wherein t1 is 1 , L1is NH, and both RL2are H) as previously described in Schemes 5 and 6.

[0364] Scheme 7

[0365] 7-3'

[0366] In some instances, preparation of an amine of structure 1-2 is required to synthesize compounds of Formula I. Scheme 8 outlines an example preparation of an amine of structure 1-2. One skilled in the art will understand that amino piperidines of structure 8-1 can be converted to compounds of structure 8-3, for example, either via a direct nucleophilic substitution (SNAr) reaction or using metal catalysis, with a metal such as copper or palladium. For example, an aryl halide or heteroaryl halide of structure 8-2 wherein X is halide and R3is as shown in the scheme (such as an aryl bromide), can be coupled to a compound of structure 8-1 using a catalyst (such as copper (I) iodide) in the presence of an appropriate base (such as cesium carbonate) to provide an intermediate of structure 8-3. These reactions can be performed in a suitable solvent (such as / V, / Vdimethylformamide). Deprotection of the intermediate 8-3 can be affected by treatment with acid, such as hydrogen chloride, trifluoroacetic acid or a sulfonic acid such as methane sulfonic acid to afford a compound of structure 1 -2. One skilled in the art will understand that other protecting group instead of Boc in the compound of structure 8-1 may be used successfully here as well, and removed with appropriate conditions. For example, if a carboxybenzyl (Cbz) group is employed as a protecting group, subsequent removal could be effected by exposure to palladium on carbon under an atmosphere of hydrogen gas in a suitable solvent (such as methanol). Choice of reaction conditions may also allow for an intermediate of the structure 1-2 to be made directly from an unprotected variant of the compound of structure 8-1 , avoiding the need for a separate deprotection step. For example, an unprotected variant of the amino piperidine of structure 8-1 can used in an aromatic substitution reaction with a suitable aryl or heteroaryl halide, such as 4- fluoro benzoic acid or ester derivatives, in the presence of a base such as potassium of cesium carbonate, in a solvent such as dimethylsulfoxide, to yield an intermediate of structure 1-2 directly and without the need for removal of protecting groups. Intermediates of structure 1-2 can be elaborated to compound of Formula I according to the methods described herein. Scheme 8

[0367] Scheme 9 depicts another synthetic variation in which the function group transformations in the R3group are accomplished prior to full assembly of the compounds. For example, an intermediate 9-1 (which is an example of compound of structure 8-3 wherein R3is R3aand RAis -C(=O)-O-CH3, i.e., a methyl ester) can be converted into the corresponding acid intermediate 9-2 (which is an example of compound of structure 8-3) by well established methods, such as treatment with a base such as lithium hydroxide in a suitable solvent or solvent system, such as a mixture of tetrahydrofuran, methanol, and water. Other esters may also be used and removed with compatible conditions well known in the art. For example a benzyl ester may be cleaved under the conditions as described, but may also be removed upon exposure to palladium on carbon under an atmosphere of hydrogen gas in a suitable solvent. The acid intermediate 9-2 can be converted into an amide 9-3 by a variety of methods extensively described in the literature. One such condition is treatment with 1 ,1 carbonyldiimidazole in a solvent such as dimethylformamide, followed by an amine source, such as ammonium hydroxide or methylamine to afford a compound of structure 9-3 (which is an example of a compound of structure 8-3). Deprotection of the compound of structure 9-3 (using a method as described for 8-3 herein above) will afford a compound of structure 9-4 (which is an example of compound of structure 1-2). These compounds can then be elaborated to compounds of structure 9-5 (which is a compound of Formula I wherein R3is R3aand RAis - C(=O)-N(R7)(R8)) by similar methods to those described herein. It should also be noted that while Scheme 9 depicts an approach for a compound of structure 9-4 (which is an example of compound of structure 1-2) that in turn leads to a compound of Formula I wherein R3is R3a, the same transformations in Scheme 9 also can be used for making a compound of Formula I wherein R3is R3bby choosing appropriately substituted starting materials. Scheme 9

[0368] Scheme 10 depicts still another reaction scheme for preparing compounds of Formula I. In this approach, amidation of an acid of structure 1-1 with amine 10-1 affords an amide of structure 10-2. As in Scheme 1 , amide bond forming reactions of this type can be achieved by combining a carboxylic acid (such as carboxylic acid structure 1-1) with an amine (such as amine of structure 10-1) in the presence of an activating reagent (such as 2,4,6-tripropyl- 1 ,3,5,2,4,6-trioxatriphosphorinane-2,4,6-trioxide or 1 -ethyl-3-(3-dimethylaminopropyl)- carbodiimide) and a base (such as 1 -methyl imidazole or A / , / V-diisopropylethylamine) in a suitable solvent (such as dichloromethane). It is well known to those skilled in the art that numerous alternate conditions may be selected to accomplish this amidation. The compound of structure 10-2 can be deprotected with an acid such as trifluoroacetic acid or hydrogen chloride. One skilled in the art will understand that other protecting groups may be used successfully here as well and removed with appropriate conditions. For example, a Cbz group could be used to protect the cyclic nitrogen, which deprotection can be accomplished several conditions know to those skilled in the art. For example, exposure to palladium on carbon under an atmosphere of hydrogen gas in a suitable solvent (such as methanol) can effect the deprotection to afford a compound of structure 10-3. The compound of structure 10-3 can be coupled with aryl halide or heteroaryl halide of structure 8-2 to afford compounds of Formula I. For example a compound of structure 10-3 can be reacted with an aryl halide or heteroaryl halide of structure 8-2 in the presence of a base (such as 2-te / Y-butyl-1 , 1 ,3,3- tetramethylguanidine) and a palladium catalyst (such as [(2-di-te / Y-butylphosphino-2',4',6'- triisopropyl-1 ,1'-biphenyl)-2-(2'-amino-1 ,1'-biphenyl)] palladium(ll) methanesulfonate) in a suitable solvent (such as dimethyl sulfoxide) to afford a compound of Formula I. Scheme 10

[0369] Scheme 11 depicts a method of making an aniline derivative 11 -3 (which is an example of compound of structure 2-3). An intermediate bromide 11 -1 can be coupled with a compound of structure 11-2 to afford the intermediate 11-3. An aryl bromide or heteroaryl of structure 11-1 can be reacted with, for example, a vinyl boronic ester 11-2 (wherein R1is, for example, vinyl, alkenyl, or the like; each R” is H, alkyl, or the like, or two OR”, together with the boron atom to which they are attached, optionally form a 4- 7-membered heterocylcoalkyl optionally substituted with one or more substituents such as alkyl, or the like) in the presence of an appropriate catalyst (such as [1 ,1 ’-bis(diphenylphosphino)ferrocene]dichloropalladium(ll)), a base (such as potassium carbonate) in a solvent (such as 1 ,4 dioxane) to afford 11-3. If the intermediate of structure 11-3 contains a functional group, additional transformation can be effected to yield another compound of structure 11-3. For example, if a compound of structure 11-3 contains an alkenyl group, hydrogenation of that the alkenyl group using a catalyst (such as palladium on carbon) will provide another compound of structure 11-3 containing a resultant alkyl group (which is also an example of a compound of structure 1 -2). Scheme 11

[0370] 11-1 11-3

[0371] Scheme 12 refers to the preparation of a non-racemic compound of Formula la. A non- racemic compound (such as a compound of structure 2-1a, 3-1a, or4-1a) can be transformed according to the methods described herein to afford a non-racemic compound of Formula la. One skilled in the art will recognize that the enantiomeric purity observed for the compound of Formula la can be influenced by numerous factors (such as the synthetic sequence utilized, the reagents selected for each transformation, and the purification methods employed). Scheme 12 Additional starting materials and intermediates useful for making the compounds of the present invention can be obtained from chemical vendors such as Sigma-Aldrich or can be made according to methods described in the chemical art.

[0372] Those skilled in the art can recognize that in all of the Schemes described herein, if there are functional (reactive) groups present on a part of the compound structure such as a substituent group, for example R1, R2, R3, R3a, R3b, RA, L1, T1, T2, T3, T4, T5, T6, T7, T8, T9, T10, T11, T12, etc., further modification can be made if appropriate and / or desired, using methods well known to those skilled in the art. For example, a -CN group can be hydrolyzed to afford an amide group; a carboxylic acid can be converted to an amide; a carboxylic acid can be converted to an ester, which in turn can be reduced to an alcohol, which in turn can be further modified. For another example, an OH group can be converted into a better leaving group such as a methanesulfonate, which in turn is suitable for nucleophilic substitution, such as by a cyanide ion (CN ). For another example, an ester group can be hydrolyzed to a carboxylic acid group. For yet another example, an unsaturated bond such as C=C or C=C can be reduced to a saturated bond by hydrogenation. One skilled in the art will recognize further such modifications. Thus, a compound of Formula I having a substituent that contains a functional group can be converted to another compound of Formula I having a different substituent group.

[0373] Similarly, those skilled in the art can also recognize that in all of the schemes described herein, if there are functional (reactive) groups present on a substituent group such as R3these functional groups can be protected / deprotected in the course of the synthetic scheme described here, if appropriate and / or desired. For example, an OH group can be protected by a benzyl, methyl, or acetyl group, which can be deprotected and converted back to the OH group in a later stage of the synthetic process. For another example, a carboxylic group can be protected by an alkyl group (thus forming an ester group); conversion back to the carboxylic group group can be carried out at a later stage of the synthetic process via deprotection.

[0374] As used herein, the term “reacting” (or “reaction” or “reacted”) refers to the bringing together of designated chemical reactants such that a chemical transformation takes place generating a compound different from any initially introduced into the system. Reactions can take place in the presence or absence of solvent.

[0375] A detailed description of the individual reaction steps is provided in the Example section below. Those skilled in the art will appreciate that other synthetic routes may be used to synthesize the compounds. Although specific starting materials and reagents are discussed below, other starting materials and reagents can be easily substituted to provide a variety of derivatives and / or reaction conditions. In addition, many of the compounds prepared by the methods described below can be further modified in light of this disclosure using conventional chemistry well known to those skilled in the art.

[0376] The following illustrate the synthesis of various compounds of the present invention. Additional compounds within the scope of this invention may be prepared using the methods illustrated in these Examples, either alone or in combination with techniques generally known in the art. All starting materials in these Preparations and Examples are either commercially available or can be prepared by methods known in the art or as described herein.

[0377] Reactions were performed in air or, when oxygen- or moisture-sensitive reagents or intermediates were employed, under an inert atmosphere (nitrogen or argon). When appropriate, reaction apparatuses were dried under dynamic vacuum using a heat gun, and anhydrous solvents (Sure-Seal™ products from Sigma-Aldrich or DriSolv™ products from EMD Chemicals, Gibbstown, NJ) were employed. In some cases, commercial solvents were passed through columns packed with 4A molecular sieves, until the following QC standards for water were attained: a) <100 ppm for dichloromethane, toluene, / V, / V-dimethylformamide, and tetrahydrofuran; b) <180 ppm for methanol, ethanol, 1 ,4-dioxane, and diisopropylamine. For very sensitive reactions, solvents were further treated with metallic sodium, calcium hydride, or molecular sieves, and distilled just prior to use. Other commercial solvents and reagents were used without further purification. For syntheses referencing procedures in other Examples or Methods, reaction conditions (reaction time and temperature) may vary. Products were generally dried under vacuum before being carried on to further reactions or submitted for biological testing.

[0378] When indicated, reactions were heated by microwave irradiation using Biotage Initiator or Personal Chemistry Emrys Optimizer microwave instruments. Reaction progress was monitored using thin-layer chromatography (TLC), liquid chromatography-mass spectrometry (LCMS), high-performance liquid chromatography (HPLC), and / or gas chromatography-mass spectrometry (GCMS) analyses. TLC was performed on pre-coated silica gel plates with a fluorescence indicator (254 nm excitation wavelength) and visualized under UV light and / or with l2, KMnO4, CoCI2, phosphomolybdic acid, or ceric ammonium molybdate stains. LCMS data were acquired on an Agilent 1100 Series instrument with a Leap Technologies autosampler, Gemini C18 columns, acetonitrile / water gradients, and either trifluoroacetic acid, formic acid, or ammonium hydroxide modifiers. The column eluent was analyzed using a Waters ZQ mass spectrometer scanning in both positive and negative ion modes from 100 to 1200 Da. Other similar instruments were also used. HPLC data were generally acquired on an Agilent 1100 Series instrument using Gemini or XBridge C18 columns, acetonitrile / water gradients, and either trifluoroacetic acid or ammonium hydroxide modifiers. GCMS data were acquired using a Hewlett Packard 6890 oven with an HP 6890 injector, HP-1 column (12 m x 0.2 mm x 0.33 pm), and helium carrier gas. Samples were analyzed on an HP 5973 mass selective detector, scanning from 50 to 550 Da using electron ionization. Purifications were generally performed by medium performance liquid chromatography (MPLC) using Isco CombiFlash Companion, AnaLogix IntelliFlash 280, Biotage SP1 , or Biotage Isolera One instruments and pre-packed Isco RediSep or Biotage Snap silica cartridges. Chiral purifications were generally performed by chiral supercritical fluid chromatography (SFC) using Berger or Thar instruments; ChiralPAK- AD, -AS, -IC, Chiralcel-OD, or -OJ columns; and CO2mixtures with methanol, ethanol, propan- 2-ol, or acetonitrile, alone or modified using trifluoroacetic acid or propan-2-amine. UV detection was used to trigger fraction collection. For syntheses referencing procedures in other Examples or Methods, purifications may vary; in general, solvents and the solvent ratios used for eluents / gradients were chosen to provide appropriate Rfs or retention times.

[0379] Mass spectrometry data are reported from LCMS analyses. Mass spectrometry (MS) was performed via atmospheric pressure chemical ionization (APCI), electrospray ionization (ESI), electron impact ionization (El) or electron scatter (ES) ionization sources. Proton nuclear magnetic spectroscopy (1H NMR) chemical shifts are given in parts per million downfield from tetramethylsilane and were recorded on 300, 400, 500, or 600 MHz Varian, Bruker, or Jeol spectrometers. Chemical shifts are expressed in parts per million (ppm, 8) referenced to the deuterated solvent residual peaks (chloroform, 7.26 ppm; CD2HOD, 3.31 ppm; acetonitrile-c / 2, 1 .94 ppm; dimethyl sulfoxide-c / 5, 2.50 ppm; DHO, 4.79 ppm). The peak shapes are described as follows: s, singlet; d, doublet; t, triplet; q, quartet; quin, quintet; m, multiplet; br s, broad singlet; app, apparent. Analytical SFC data were acquired on a Berger analytical instrument as described above. Optical rotation data were acquired on a PerkinElmer model 343 polarimeter using a 1 dm cell. Silica gel chromatography was performed primarily using medium-pressure Biotage or ISCO systems using columns pre-packaged by various commercial vendors including Biotage and ISCO. Microanalyses were performed by Quantitative Technologies Inc. and were within 0.4% of the calculated values.

[0380] Unless otherwise noted, chemical reactions were performed at room temperature (about 23 degrees Celsius).

[0381] Unless noted otherwise, all reactants were obtained commercially without further purifications or were prepared using methods known in the literature.

[0382] The terms “concentrated,” “evaporated,” and “concentrated in vacuo" refer to the removal of solvent at reduced pressure on a rotary evaporator with a bath temperature less than 60 °C. The abbreviation “min” and “h” stand for “minutes” and “hours” respectively. The term “TLC” refers to thin-layer chromatography, “room temperature or ambient temperature” means a temperature between 18 and 25 °C, “GCMS” refers to gas chromatography-mass spectrometry, “LCMS” refers to liquid chromatography-mass spectrometry, “UPLC” refers to ultra-performance liquid chromatography and “HPLC” refers to high-performance liquid chromatography, “SFC” refers to supercritical fluid chromatography.

[0383] Hydrogenation may be performed in a Parr shaker under pressurized hydrogen gas, or in a Thales-nano H-Cube flow hydrogenation apparatus at full hydrogen and a flow rate between 1 and 2 mL / minute at the specified temperature.

[0384] HPLC, UPLC, LCMS, GCMS, and SFC retention times were measured using the methods noted in the procedures. In some examples, chiral separations were carried out to separate enantiomers or diastereomers of certain compounds of the invention (in some examples, the separated enantiomers are designated as ENANT-1 and ENANT-2, according to their order of elution; similarly, separated diastereomers are designated as DIAST-1 and DIAST-2, according to their order of elution). In some examples, the optical rotation of an enantiomer was measured using a polarimeter. According to its observed rotation data (or its specific rotation data), an enantiomer with a clockwise rotation was designated as the (+)-enantiomer and an enantiomer with a counter-clockwise rotation was designated as the (-)-enantiomer. Racemic compounds are indicated either by the absence of drawn or described stereochemistry, or by the presence of (+ / -) adjacent to the structure; in this latter case, the indicated stereochemistry represents just one of the two enantiomers that make up the racemic mixture.

[0385] The compounds and intermediates described below were named using the naming convention provided with ACD / ChemSketch 2020.2.1.1 , File Version C25H41 , Build 121153 (Advanced Chemistry Development, Inc., Toronto, Ontario, Canada). The naming convention provided with ACD / ChemSketch 2020.2.1 .1 is well known by those skilled in the art and it is believed that the naming convention provided with ACD / ChemSketch 2020.2.1.1 generally comports with the IUPAC (International Union for Pure and Applied Chemistry) recommendations on Nomenclature of Organic Chemistry and the CAS Index rules.

[0386] PREPARATIONS

[0387] Preparations P1 to P16 describe preparations of some starting materials or intermediates used for preparation of certain compounds of the invention.

[0388] Preparation P1

[0389] 1 -{[4-(Propan-2-yl)phenyl]carbamoyl}-D-proline (P1)

[0390] P1

[0391] 4-Methylmorpholine (20.5 mL, 186 mmol) was added to a 2 °C to 3 °C mixture of D- proline (21.4 g, 186 mmol) in tetra hydro furan (520 mL). After 2 minutes, 1-isocyanato-4- (propan-2-yl)benzene (25.0 g, 155 mmol) was added over 30 seconds, whereupon stirring was continued for 5 minutes before the reaction mixture was removed from the ice bath and allowed to stir at room temperature. Two hours later, LCMS analysis indicated formation of P1: LCMS m / z 27 A [M+H]+. Water (500 mL) was added, followed by solid sodium bicarbonate (19.5 g, 233 mmol), yielding a pH of 7 to 8. The resulting mixture was washed with methyl te / Y-butyl ether (2 x 600 mL); the aqueous layer was then acidified to pH 2 by addition of concentrated hydrochloric acid and stirred for 20 minutes. Filtration, followed by rinsing of the filter cake with water, provided P1 as a white solid. Yield: 39.1 g, 141 mmol, 91%.1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO- cfe) 8 12.36 (br s, 1 H), 8.16 (s, 1 H), 7.38 (d, J = 8.6 Hz, 2H), 7.09 (d, J = 8.5 Hz, 2H), 4.34 - 4.26 (m, 1 H), 3.58 - 3.50 (m, 1 H), 3.49 - 3.41 (m, 1 H), 2.81 (septet, J = 6.9 Hz, 1 H), 2.22 - 2.11 (m, 1 H), 1.97 - 1.83 (m, 3H), 1.17 (d, J = 6.9 Hz, 6H).

[0392] Preparation P2

[0393] 1 -{[3-Fluoro-4-(propan-2-yl)phenyl]carbamoyl}-D-proline (P2)

[0394] Step 1. Synthesis of 3-fluoro-4-(prop-1-en-2-yl)aniline (C1).

[0395] To a solution of 4-bromo-3-fluoroaniline (5.25 g, 27.6 mmol) in a mixture of 1 ,4-dioxane (110 mL) and water (11 mL) were added 4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-2-(prop-1 -en-2-yl)-1 ,3,2- dioxaborolane (4.64 g, 27.6 mmol), potassium carbonate (11.5 g, 83.2 mmol), and [1 ,1 - bis(diphenylphosphino)ferrocene]dichloropalladium(ll) (0.607 g, 0.830 mmol). The reaction mixture was heated at 90 °C for 18 hours, whereupon it was diluted with water (100 mL) and extracted with ethyl acetate (3 x 50 mL). The combined organic layers were washed with saturated aqueous sodium chloride solution (3 x 60 mL), dried over sodium sulfate, filtered, and concentrated under reduced pressure. The residue was dissolved in diethyl ether (100 mL), treated with hydrochloric acid (1 M; 50 mL) and water (50 mL), and stirred at room temperature for 20 minutes. After the organic layer had been extracted with water (50 mL), the combined aqueous layers were basified to pH 9 by addition of sodium bicarbonate. The resulting mixture was extracted with ethyl acetate (3 x 60 mL), and the combined ethyl acetate layers were dried over sodium sulfate, filtered, and concentrated in vacuo, providing an oil (5.0 g). A portion of this material (2.0 g) was purified via chromatography on silica gel (Gradient: 0% to 50% ethyl acetate in heptane) to afford C1 as a yellow oil (1 .31 g). Adjusted yield: 0.940 g when corrected for residual ethyl acetate, 6.22 mmol. Adjusting for only 40% of the crude product being purified, reaction yield: 56%. GCMS: m / z 151.1 [M+],1H NMR (400 MHz, chloroform-d) 8 7.10 (t, J = 8.5 Hz, 1 H), 6.40 (dd, component of ABX system, J = 8.2, 2.4 Hz, 1 H), 6.36 (dd, component of ABX system, J = 12.9, 2.3 Hz, 1 H), 5.19 - 5.15 (m, 1 H), 5.12 - 5.08 (m, 1 H), 2.12 - 2.07 (m, 3H).

[0396] Step 2. Synthesis of 3-fluoro-4-(propan-2-yl)aniline (C2).

[0397] To a solution of C1 (21.0 g, 139 mmol) in methanol (150 mL) was added palladium hydroxide (20%, 10 g), and the mixture was hydrogenated at 50 °C and 50 psi until GCMS analysis indicated complete consumption of starting material. The reaction mixture was concentrated in vacuo, whereupon it was purified using silica gel chromatography (Gradient: 0% to 50% dichloromethane in hexanes) to afford C2 as a light-colored oil. Yield: 11 .4 g, 74.4 mmol, 54%. GCMS m / z 153.1 [M+],1H NMR (400 MHz, chloroform-d) 8 7.00 (t, J = 8.4 Hz, 1 H), 6.42 (dd, component of ABX system, J = 8.2, 2.4 Hz, 1 H), 6.35 (dd, component of ABX system, J = 12.1 , 2.4 Hz, 1 H), 3.95 - 3.28 (br m, 2H), 3.11 (septet, J = 6.9 Hz, 1 H), 1 .21 (d, J = 6.9 Hz, 6H).

[0398] Step 3. Synthesis of 1-{[3-fluoro-4-(propan-2-yl)phenyl]carbamoyl}-D-proline (P2).

[0399] To a 0 °C solution of 1 ,1 ’-carbonyldiimidazole (13.2 g, 81.4 mmol) in acetonitrile (170 mL) was added C2 (11.4 g, 74.4 mmol). After the reaction mixture had been stirred at room temperature for 1 hour, it was concentrated under reduced pressure and the residue was dissolved in tetra hydro furan (5 mL).

[0400] To a solution of D-proline (10.3 g, 89.5 mmol) in tetrahydrofuran (10 mL) were added 4- methylmorpholine (9.80 mL, 89.1 mmol) and the solution of the crude intermediate from above in tetrahydrofuran (5 mL), whereupon the reaction mixture was stirred for 2 hours at room temperature. Saturated aqueous sodium bicarbonate solution (5 mL) was added, providing an internal pH of 7 to 8. The resulting mixture was washed with diethyl ether (2 x 30 mL), acidified to pH 3 by addition of 4 M hydrochloric acid, and extracted with ethyl acetate (3 x 50 mL); the combined ethyl acetate layers were washed with saturated aqueous sodium chloride solution (30 mL), dried over sodium sulfate, filtered, and concentrated under reduced pressure to a volume of approximately 30 mL. The resulting heterogeneous mixture was stirred at room temperature for 20 minutes, diluted with methyl te / Y-butyl ether (125 mL), and stirred for an additional 20 minutes, whereupon heptane (60 mL) was added. After 2 further hours of stirring, solids were collected via filtration and purified using chromatography on silica gel (Gradient: 0% to 5% methanol in dichloromethane) to afford P2 as a white solid (8.71 g). Mixed fractions were subjected to silica gel chromatography (Gradient: 50% to 100% ethyl acetate in heptane) to provide additional P2 as a white solid (3.96 g). Combined yield: 12.7 g, 43.1 mmol, 58%. LCMS m / z 295.3 [M+H]+.1H NMR (400 MHz, methanol-c / 4) 5 7.23 (dd, J = 13.0, 2.1 Hz, 1 H), 7.15 (dd, component of ABX system, J = 8.3, 9.1 Hz, 1 H), 7.11 (dd, component of ABX system, J = 8.5, 2.0 Hz, 1 H), 4.47 (dd, J = 8.2, 3.0 Hz, 1 H), 3.69 - 3.59 (m, 1 H), 3.58 - 3.49 (m, 1 H), 3.14 (septet, J = 7.0 Hz, 1 H), 2.34 - 2.21 (m, 1 H), 2.13 - 2.00 (m, 3H), 1 .23 (d, J = 6.9 Hz, 6H).

[0401] Preparation P3

[0402] 1 -{[3-Methyl-4-(propan-2-yl)phenyl]carbamoyl}-D-proline (P3)

[0403] Step 1. Synthesis of 3-methyl-4-(prop-1-en-2-yl)aniline (C3).

[0404] To a solution of 4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-2-(prop-1-en-2-yl)-1 ,3,2-dioxaborolane (69.5 g, 414 mmol) and 4-bromo-3-methylaniline (70.0 g, 376 mmol) in a mixture of tetrahydrofuran (1 .5 L) and water (150 mL) was added cesium carbonate (368 g, 1 .13 mol). [1 ,1 - Bis(diphenylphosphino)ferrocene]dichloropalladium(ll), dichloromethane complex (10.0 g, 12.2 mmol) was then added, whereupon the reaction mixture was heated at 75 °C for 16 hours. After dilution with water (400 mL), the mixture was extracted with ethyl acetate (2 x 350 mL), and the combined organic layers were washed with saturated aqueous sodium chloride solution (2 x 300 mL), dried over sodium sulfate, filtered, and concentrated in vacuo. Chromatography on silica get (Gradient: 0% to 15% ethyl acetate in petroleum ether) provided C3 as an orange oil. Yield: 43.0 g, 292 mmol, 78%. LCMS m / z 148.1 [M+H]+.1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-c / 6) 56.77 (d, J = 8.0 Hz, 1 H), 6.37 (d, half of AB quartet, J = 2.4 Hz, 1 H), 6.34 (dd, component of ABX system, J = 8.1 , 2.4 Hz, 1 H), 5.09 - 5.05 (m, 1 H), 4.90 (br s, 2H), 4.71 - 4.67 (m, 1 H), 2.13 (s, 3H), 1.95 - 1.92 (m, 3H).

[0405] Step 2. Synthesis of 3-methyl-4-(propan-2-yl)aniline, hydrochloride salt (C4).

[0406] A solution of C3 (43.0 g, 292 mmol) in methanol (530 mL) was added to a mixture of palladium on carbon (15.5 g) in methanol (200 mL). After the reaction mixture had been degassed once with argon and three times with hydrogen, it was hydrogenated at 45 psi and 25 °C for 16 hours. Filtration through a pad of diatomaceous earth was followed by concentration of the filtrate under reduced pressure; the resulting oil was dissolved in dichloromethane (250 mL), treated with a solution of hydrogen chloride in 1 ,4-dioxane (2.0 M; 175 mL, 350 mmol), and stirred in an ice bath for 1 hour. The reaction mixture was concentrated in vacuo, and the residue was diluted with dichloromethane (200 mL) and concentrated again. The dilution and concentration procedure was carried out a total of three times, whereupon the crude product was mixed with petroleum ether (80 mL) and methyl te / Y-butyl ether (20 mL). After the resulting suspension had been stirred at 25 °C for 20 minutes, it was filtered. The filter cake was washed sequentially with petroleum ether (3 x 30 mL) and methyl te / Y-butyl ether (2 x 30 mL), affording C4 as a white solid. Yield: 45 g, 240 mmol, 82%. LCMS m / z 150.2 [M+H]+.1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-c / e) 5 10.32 (br s, 3H), 7.33 (d, component of ABC system, J = 8.3 Hz, 1 H), 7.17 (dd, component of ABC system, J = 8.3, 2.4 Hz, 1 H), 7.11 (d, component of ABC system, J = 2.4 Hz, 1 H), 3.10 (septet, J = 6.8 Hz, 1 H), 2.31 (s, 3H), 1.16 (d, J = 6.8 Hz, 6H).

[0407] Step 3. Synthesis of 1-{[3-methyl-4-(propan-2-yl)phenyl]carbamoyl}-D-proline (P3).

[0408] Triethylamine (31.5 mL, 226 mmol) was added drop-wise to a 5 °C solution of C4 (42.0 g, 226 mmol) in acetonitrile (1.5 L). After the resulting mixture had been stirred at 5 °C for 20 minutes, 1 ,1 ’-carbonyldiimidazole (36.7 g, 226 mmol) was added in portions at 5 °C. The reaction mixture was allowed to warm to 20 °C and stirred for 2 hours; the resulting solution contained 4-isocyanato-2-methyl-1 -(propan-2-yl)benzene.

[0409] To a 5 °C solution of D-proline (29.6 g, 257 mmol) in tetrahydrofuran (1 .0 L) was added 4-methylmorpholine (30.9 mL, 281 mmol), whereupon the solution of 4-isocyanato-2-methyl-1- (propan-2-yl)benzene in acetonitrile (1.5 L) was poured slowly into the mixture. The reaction mixture was warmed to 25 °C and stirred for 2 hours. After removal of solvents in vacuo, the residue was poured into water (300 mL). The aqueous mixture was adjusted to pH 8 by addition of aqueous sodium bicarbonate solution, washed with methyl te / Y-butyl ether (4 x 300 mL), and acidified to pH 2 with 1 M hydrochloric acid. The resulting suspension was filtered, and the filter cake was washed with water (2 x 100 mL) and lyophilized. This solid was stirred in a mixture of methyl te / Y-butyl ether (60 mL), petroleum ether (60 mL), and ethyl acetate (20 mL) for 30 minutes and isolated via filtration. The collected solids were washed with a mixture of methyl te / Y-butyl ether (30 mL), petroleum ether (30 mL), and ethyl acetate (10 mL), followed by petroleum ether (80 mL), to afford P3 as a white solid. Yield: 58.1 g, 200 mmol, 88%. LCMS m / z 291.3 [M+H]+.1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-c / 6) 5 12.39 (br s, 1 H), 8.09 (s, 1 H), 7.29 - 7.21 (m, 2H), 7.07 (d, J = 8.2 Hz, 1 H), 4.34 - 4.24 (m, 1 H), 3.57 - 3.48 (m, 1 H), 3.48 - 3.40 (m, 1 H), 3.01 (septet, J = 6.8 Hz, 1 H), 2.23 (s, 3H), 2.21 - 2.09 (m, 1 H), 1 .98 - 1 .81 (m, 3H), 1 .14 (d, J = 6.8 Hz, 6H).

[0410] Preparation P4

[0411] 1-{[3-Methyl-4-(trifluoromethyl)phenyl]carbamoyl}-D-proline (P4)

[0412] P4

[0413] To a solution of 3-methyl-4-(trifluoromethyl)aniline (250 mg, 1.43 mmol) in dichloromethane (7.1 mL) was added bis(trichloromethyl) carbonate (148 mg, 0.499 mmol), followed by 4-(dimethylamino)pyridine (523 mg, 4.28 mmol). After 10 minutes, D-proline (197 g, 1.71 mmol) was added; once the reaction mixture had been stirred for 10 minutes, LCMS analysis indicated the presence of P4: LCMS m / z 317.4 [M+H]+. Stirring was continued for a further 30 minutes, whereupon the reaction mixture was extracted with saturated aqueous sodium bicarbonate solution. The aqueous layer was acidified to pH 2 by addition of concentrated hydrochloric acid, and the resulting mixture was extracted twice with ethyl acetate. The combined organic layers were dried over sodium sulfate, filtered, and concentrated in vacuo to provide P4 as an off-white solid. Yield: 95 mg, 0.30 mmol, 21 %.1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-c / e) 5 12.45 (br s, 1 H), 8.58 (br s, 1 H), 7.58 (s, 1 H), 7.56 - 7.48 (m, 2H), 4.38 - 4.27 (m, 1 H), 3.62 - 3.44 (m, 2H), 2.39 - 2.35 (m, 3H), 2.24 - 2.12 (m, 1 H), 1.98 - 1.84 (m, 3H). Preparation P5

[0414] 1 -{[4- (T rifluoromethyl)phenyl]carbamoyl}-D-proline (P5)

[0415] 4-Methylmorpholine (3.53 mL, 32.1 mmol) and 1-isocyanato-4-(trifluoromethyl)benzene (5.00 g, 26.7 mmol) were added to a solution of D-proline (3.69 g, 32.1 mmol) in tetrahydrofuran (89 mL); after the reaction mixture had been stirred at 20 °C for 2 hours, water (100 mL) was added, followed by solid sodium bicarbonate. The resulting mixture, pH 7 to 8, was washed with methyl te / Y-butyl ether (2 x 100 mL). The aqueous layer was then acidified to pH 3 by addition of concentrated hydrochloric acid, resulting in the formation of a white precipitate. This material was collected via filtration and lyophilized for 16 hours, providing P5 as a white solid. Yield: 5.12 g, 16.9 mmol, 63%. LCMS m / z 303.0 [M+H]+.1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-c / 6) 5 12.49 (br s, 1 H), 8.69 (br s, 1 H), 7.74 (d, J = 8.5 Hz, 2H), 7.58 (d, J = 8.6 Hz, 2H), 4.41 - 4.27 (m, 1 H), 3.64 - 3.45 (m, 2H), 2.26 - 2.11 (m, 1 H), 2.00 - 1 .83 (m, 3H).

[0416] Preparation P6

[0417] 1 -{[4- (T rifluoromethoxy)phenyl]carbamoyl}-D-proline (P6)

[0418] 4-Methylmorpholine (5.11 mL, 46.5 mmol) and 1-isocyanato-4- (trifluoromethoxy)benzene (7.87 g, 38.7 mmol) were added to a solution of D-proline (5.35 g, 46.5 mmol) in tetra hydrofuran (129 mL), whereupon the reaction mixture was stirred at 25 °C overnight. Water (150 mL) was added, followed by solid sodium bicarbonate, which brought the mixture to a pH of 7 to 8. After the mixture had been washed with methyl te / Y-butyl ether (2 x 80 mL), the aqueous layer was acidified to pH 3 by addition of 1 M hydrochloric acid. The resulting precipitate was collected via filtration and washed with water (2 x 8 mL); lyophilization for 16 hours provided P6 as a white solid. Yield: 8.65 g, 27.2 mmol, 70%. LCMS m / z 319.0 [M+H]+.1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-c / 6) 8 12.41 (br s, 1 H), 8.48 (s, 1 H), 7.60 (d, J = 9.1 Hz, 2H), 7.23 (br d, J = 9 Hz, 2H), 4.37 - 4.25 (m, 1 H), 3.60 - 3.51 (m, 1 H), 3.51 - 3.43 (m, 1 H), 2.24 - 2.11 (m, 1 H), 1 .99 - 1.82 (m, 3H).

[0419] Preparation P7

[0420] A / -[4-(T rifluoromethyl)phenyl]glycyl-D-proline (P7)

[0421] 2) CF3COOH

[0422] A / -[4-(Trifluoromethyl)phenyl]glycine (1 .37 g, 6.25 mmol) was treated sequentially with 1 - [3-(dimethylamino)propyl]-3-ethylcarbodiimide hydrochloride (1 .56 g, 8.14 mmol), dichloromethane (25.0 mL), and te / Y-butyl D-prolinate (1.07 g, 6.25 mmol). After the reaction mixture had been stirred at room temperature for 20 hours, it was diluted with dichloromethane (40 mL), washed sequentially with water (2 x 30 mL) and saturated aqueous sodium chloride solution (25 mL), dried over sodium sulfate, filtered, and concentrated under reduced pressure. Silica gel chromatography (Gradient: 0% to 50% ethyl acetate in heptane) provided a white solid, which was dissolved in dichloromethane (3 mL) and treated with trifluoroacetic acid (4.82 mL, 62.6 mmol). After this reaction mixture had been stirred at room temperature for 24 hours, it was diluted with dichloromethane (15 mL), washed sequentially with water (2 x 15 mL) and saturated aqueous sodium chloride solution (15 mL), dried over sodium sulfate, filtered, and concentrated in vacuo to afford P7 as an off-white solid. By1H NMR analysis, this compound exists as a mixture of rotamers. Yield: 283 mg, 0.895 mmol, 14%. LCMS m / z 317.3 [M+H]+.1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-c / 6), integrations are approximate: 8 7.36 (d, J = 8.4 Hz, 2H), [6.73 (d, J = 8.5 Hz) and 6.66 (d, J = 8.5 Hz), total 2H], 6.54 - 6.40 (m, 1 H), [4.65 (dd, J = 8.5, 2.3 Hz) and 4.21 (dd, J = 8.7, 4.0 Hz), total 1 H], 4.08 - 3.87 (m, 2H), [3.60 (t, J = 6.8 Hz) and 3.46 - 3.38 (m), total 2H], [2.28 - 2.04 (m) and 1 .99 - 1 .88 (m), total 3H], 1 .88 - 1 .76 (m, 1 H). Preparation P8

[0423] 1-{[4-(Trifluoromethyl)phenoxy]acetyl}-D-proline (P8)

[0424] 2) CF3COOH

[0425] A reaction flask was sequentially charged with [4-(trifluoromethyl)phenoxy]acetic acid (2.86 g, 13.0 mmol), 1-[3-(dimethylamino)propyl]-3-ethylcarbodiimide hydrochloride (3.24 g,

[0426] 16.9 mmol), dichloromethane (52 mL), and te / Y-butyl D-prolinate (2.23 g, 13.0 mmol), whereupon the reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 6 hours. After dilution with dichloromethane (40 mL), the solution was washed with water (2 x 30 mL) and with saturated aqueous sodium chloride solution (20 mL), dried over sodium sulfate, filtered, and concentrated under reduced pressure. The residue was dissolved in dichloromethane (30 mL), treated with trifluoroacetic acid (10.0 mL, 130 mmol), and stirred at room temperature for 24 hours.

[0427] Dichloromethane (100 mL) was added, and the solution was washed sequentially with water (2 x 50 mL) and saturated aqueous sodium chloride solution (50 mL), dried over sodium sulfate, filtered, and concentrated in vacuo, providing P8 as a white foam. LCMS m / z 318.1 [M+H]+. Preparation P9

[0428] (2R)-A / 2-(Piperidin-4-yl)-A / 1-[4-(propan-2-yl)phenyl]pyrrolidine-1 ,2-dicarboxamide (P9) Step 1 . Synthesis of tert-butyl 4-[(1 -{[4-(propan-2-yl)phenyl]carbamoyl}-D- prolyl)amino]piperidine-1 -carboxylate (C5).

[0429] A mixture of P1 (3.00 g, 10.9 mmol), fert-butyl 4-aminopiperidine-1 -carboxylate (2.17 g, 10.8 mmol), and 1 -[3-(dimethylamino)propyl]-3-ethylcarbodiimide hydrochloride (2.71 g, 14.1 mmol) in dichloromethane (54 mL) was stirred at room temperature for 18 hours. After the reaction mixture had been diluted with dichloromethane (50 mL), it was washed sequentially with water (2 x 40 mL) and saturated aqueous sodium chloride solution (30 mL), dried over sodium sulfate, filtered, and concentrated in vacuo. The residue was stirred in methyl fert-butyl ether for 30 minutes, whereupon filtration provided C5 as a white solid. Yield: 4.48 g, 9.77 mmol, 90%. LCMS m / z 459.4 [M+H]+.1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-c / 6) 5 8.04 (s, 1 H), 7.75 (d, J = 7.9 Hz, 1 H), 7.38 (d, J = 8.6 Hz, 2H), 7.08 (d, J = 8.5 Hz, 2H), 4.24 (dd, J = 8.3, 3.4 Hz, 1 H), 3.89 - 3.76 (m, 2H), 3.76 - 3.63 (m, 1 H), 3.62 - 3.52 (m, 1 H), 3.46 - 3.36 (m, 1 H), 2.90 - 2.73 (m, 3H), 2.10 - 1.97 (m, 1 H), 1.97 - 1.75 (m, 3H), 1.70 - 1.60 (m, 2H), 1.39 (s, 9H), 1.34 - 1.19 (m, 2H), 1 .17 (d, J = 6.9 Hz, 6H).

[0430] Step 2. Synthesis of (2R)-A / 2-(piperidin-4-yl)-A / 1-[4-(propan-2-yl)phenyl]pyrrolidine-1 ,2- dicarboxamide (P9).

[0431] Trifluoroacetic acid (15.0 mL, 195 mmol) was added drop-wise to a 0 °C solution of C5 (4.48 g, 9.77 mmol) in dichloromethane (49 mL), whereupon the reaction mixture was allowed to warm to room temperature and stir for 1 hour. Saturated aqueous sodium bicarbonate solution was then added until gas no longer evolved, indicating that the resulting mixture was at a basic pH. The mixture was extracted with dichloromethane (50 mL), and the remaining aqueous layer was extracted with ethyl acetate (50 mL). After the combined organic layers had been concentrated in vacuo, the residue was dissolved in ethyl acetate (100 mL), washed sequentially with water (2 x 50 mL) and saturated aqueous sodium chloride solution (40 mL), dried over sodium sulfate, filtered, and concentrated in vacuo, affording P9 as a white solid. Yield: 2.47 g, 6.89 mmol, 70%. LCMS m / z 359.4 [M+H]+.1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-c / 6) 5 8.09 (s, 1 H), 7.99 (d, J = 7.6 Hz, 1 H), 7.38 (d, J = 8.6 Hz, 2H), 7.08 (d, J = 8.5 Hz, 2H), 4.28 (dd, J = 8.2, 3.6 Hz, 1 H), 3.80 - 3.67 (m, 1 H), 3.62 - 3.52 (m, 1 H), 3.47 - 3.37 (m, 1 H), 3.21 - 3.1 1 (m, 2H), 2.90 - 2.75 (m, 3H), 2.11 - 1.99 (m, 1 H), 1.98 - 1.73 (m, 5H), 1.62 - 1.45 (m, 2H), 1.16 (d, J = 6.9 Hz, 6H). Preparation P10 te / Y-Butyl 4-(4-aminopiperidin-1-yl)benzoate (P10) te / Y-Butyl 4-fluorobenzoate (4.00 g, 20.4 mmol) was sequentially treated with dimethyl sulfoxide (10.2 mL), piperidin-4-amine (2.25 g, 22.5 mmol), and potassium carbonate (4.23 g, 30.6 mmol), whereupon the reaction mixture was heated at 120 °C for 18 hours. After the reaction mixture had cooled to room temperature, water (20 mL) was added and stirring was continued for 45 minutes. Filtration afforded a solid, which was washed with water (100 mL) and with heptane (20 mL); it was subsequently dissolved in a 1 :1 mixture of methyl te / Y-butyl ether and heptane (approximately 150 mL) at 65 °C. Upon cooling, a precipitate formed, which was collected via filtration to provide P10 as a white solid. Yield: 3.02 g, 10.9 mmol, 53%. LCMS m / z 277.3 [M+H]+.1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-cfe), characteristic peaks: 8 7.69 (d, J = 9.0 Hz, 2H), 6.92 (d, J = 9.1 Hz, 2H), 3.79 (dt, J = 13.2, 4.0 Hz, 2H), 2.91 - 2.81 (m, 2H), 2.81 - 2.71 (m, 1 H), 1 .80 - 1 .69 (m, 2H), 1 .50 (s, 9H).

[0432] Preparation P11 te / Y-Butyl 4-(4-aminopiperidin-1 -yl)-3-fluorobenzoate, hydrochloride salt (P11)

[0433] Step 1. Synthesis of tert-butyl 4-{4-[(fert-butoxycarbonyl)amino]piperidin-1-yl}-3-fluorobenzoate (C6). fert-Butyl 4-bromo-3-fluorobenzoate (1 .6 g, 5.8 mmol), fert-butyl piperidin-4-ylcarbamate (1.0 g, 5.0 mmol), cesium carbonate (3.3 g, 10 mmol), and (2-dicyclohexylphosphino-2',6'- diisopropoxy-1 ,1 '-biphenyl)[2-(2'-amino-1 ,1 '-biphenyl)]palladiu m(l I) methanesulfonate (RuPhos Pd G3; 0.42 g, 0.50 mmol) were combined in 1 ,4-dioxane (25 mL). The reaction vessel was evacuated and charged with nitrogen; this evacuation cycle was repeated twice, whereupon the reaction mixture was heated overnight at 90 °C. It was then diluted with ethyl acetate, washed with water and with saturated aqueous sodium chloride solution, dried over sodium sulfate, filtered, and concentrated in vacuo. The residue was triturated with heptane to provide C6 as a light-yellow solid. Yield: 1.31 g, 3.32 mmol, 66%. LCMS m / z 395.5 [M+H]+.1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-cfe) 8 7.62 (dd, J = 8.5, 2.0 Hz, 1 H), 7.50 (dd, J = 13.9, 2.0 Hz, 1 H), 7.06 (t, J = 8.7 Hz, 1 H), 6.89 (br d, J = 7.9 Hz, 1 H), 3.52 - 3.36 (m, 3H), 2.87 - 2.76 (m, 2H), 1 .87 - 1 .77 (m, 2H), 1 .58 - 1 .44 (m, 2H), 1 .52 (s, 9H) 1 .39 (s, 9H).

[0434] Step 2. Synthesis of te / Y-butyl 4-(4-aminopiperidin-1-yl)-3-fluorobenzoate, hydrochloride salt (P11).

[0435] A solution of hydrogen chloride in 1 ,4-dioxane (4 M; 8.3 mL, 33 mmol) was added to a solution of C6 (1 .31 g, 3.32 mmol) in 1 ,4-dioxane (17 mL). After the reaction mixture had been stirred at room temperature overnight, it was filtered; the filter cake was washed with diethyl ether to provide P11 as a light-brown solid. Yield: 860 mg, 2.60 mmol, 78%. LCMS m / z 295.3 [M+H]+.1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-c / 6) 8 8.20 (br s, 3H), 7.63 (dd, J = 8.4, 2.0 Hz, 1 H), 7.53 (dd, J = 13.8, 1 .9 Hz, 1 H), 7.10 (t, J = 8.8 Hz, 1 H), 3.61 - 3.49 (m, 2H), 3.27 - 3.13 (m, 1 H), 2.91 - 2.79 (m, 2H), 2.06 - 1 .96 (m, 2H), 1 .75 - 1 .61 (m, 2H), 1 .52 (s, 9H).

[0436] Preparation P12

[0437] 4-(4-Aminopiperidin-1 -yl)-3,5-difluorobenzamide, hydrochloride salt (P12)

[0438] Step 1. Synthesis of methyl 4-{4-[(tert-butoxycarbonyl)amino]piperidin-1-yl}-3,5- difluorobenzoate (C7).

[0439] To a solution of te / Y-butyl piperidin-4-ylcarbamate (200 mg, 1.00 mmol) and methyl 3,4,5-trifluorobenzoate (190 mg, 0.999 mmol) in / V, / V-dimethylformamide (5.0 mL) were added potassium carbonate (414 mg, 2,97 mmol) and copper dust (31.7 mg, 0.499 mmol). After the reaction mixture had been stirred at 130 °C for 2 hours, LCMS analysis indicated conversion to C7: LCMS m / z 371.2 [M+H]+. The reaction mixture was poured into water (10 mL) and extracted with ethyl acetate (3 x 6 mL); the combined organic layers were washed with saturated aqueous sodium chloride solution (10 mL), dried over sodium sulfate, filtered, and concentrated in vacuo, affording C7 as a white solid. This material was progressed directly to the following step.

[0440] Step 2. Synthesis of 4-{4-[(te / Y-butoxycarbonyl)amino]piperidin-1-yl}-3,5-difluorobenzoic acid (C8).

[0441] A solution of C7 (from the previous step; <0.999 mmol) in a mixture of tetrahydrofuran (2.0 mL), water (0.5 mL), and methanol (2.0 mL) was treated with lithium hydroxide (120 mg, 5.01 mmol), and the reaction mixture was stirred at 25 °C for 2 hours. Removal of solvents under reduced pressure provided a residue, which was added to water (10 mL). After the resulting mixture had been adjusted to pH 4, it was extracted with ethyl acetate (3 x 5 mL); the combined organic layers were washed with saturated aqueous sodium chloride solution (10 mL), dried over sodium sulfate, filtered, and concentrated in vacuo, affording C8 as a white solid. This material was used in the following step. Yield: 267 mg, 0.749 mmol, 75% over 2 steps.

[0442] Step 3. Synthesis of te / Y-butyl [1-(4-carbamoyl-2,6-difluorophenyl)piperidin-4-yl]carbamate (C9).

[0443] 1 ,1 ’-Carbonyldiimidazole (134 mg, 0.826 mmol) was added to a solution of C8 (267 mg, 0.749 mmol) in / V, / V-dimethylformamide (4.0 mL). After the reaction mixture had been stirred at 25 °C for 50 minutes, ammonium hydroxide (1 mL) was added and stirring was continued for 15 minutes, whereupon LCMS analysis indicated conversion to C9: LCMS m / z 356.0 [M+H]+. The reaction mixture was diluted with water (10 mL) and extracted with ethyl acetate (4 x 6 mL); concentration in vacuo of the combined organic layers provided C9 as a white solid, which was progressed directly to the following step. Step 4. Synthesis of 4-(4-aminopiperidin-1 -yl)-3,5-difluorobenzamide, hydrochloride salt (P12).

[0444] A solution of C9 (from the previous step; <0.749 mmol) in a solution of hydrogen chloride in 1 ,4-dioxane (2 M; 5 mL, 10 mmol) was stirred at 25 °C for 2 hours. After removal of solvent in vacuo, the residue was stirred in methyl te / Y-butyl ether (5 mL) for 10 minutes. Filtration and washing of the filter cake with ethyl acetate (3 x 2 mL) provided P12 as a white solid. Yield: 196 mg, 0.672 mmol, 90% over 2 steps.1H NMR (400 MHz, methanol-c / 4), characteristic peaks: 8 7.53 - 7.43 (m, 2H), 3.50 - 3.41 (m, 2H), 3.29 - 3.18 (m, 2H), 2.12 - 2.03 (m, 2H), 1 .85 - 1 .72 (m, 2H).

[0445] Preparation P13 te / Y-Butyl 4-(4-aminopiperidin-1-yl)-2-methylbenzoate, hydrochloride salt (P13)

[0446] A flask containing te / Y-butyl piperidin-4-ylcarbamate (1.00 g, 4.99 mmol), cesium carbonate (4.88 g, 15.0 mmol), and (2-dicyclohexylphosphino-2',4',6'-triisopropyl-1 ,1 '- biphenyl)[2-(2'-amino-1 , 1 '-biphenyl)]palladium(l I) methanesulfonate (XPhos Pd G3; 211 mg, 0.249 mmol) was evacuated and charged with nitrogen. This evacuation cycle was repeated twice, whereupon a solution of te / Y-butyl 4-bromo-2-methylbenzoate (1 .35 g, 4.98 mmol) in toluene (20 mL) was added. After the reaction mixture had been heated at 90 °C for 24 hours, it was cooled to room temperature and diluted with water (30 mL). The aqueous layer was extracted with ethyl acetate (50 mL) and the combined organic layers were washed sequentially with water (30 mL) and saturated aqueous sodium chloride solution (30 mL), dried over sodium sulfate, filtered, and concentrated in vacuo. The residue was suspended in 1 ,4-dioxane (4 mL), treated with a solution of hydrogen chloride in 1 ,4-dioxane (4 M; 12.5 mL, 50.0 mmol), and stirred for 4 hours at room temperature. Filtration afforded P13 as a beige solid. Yield: 1.07 g, 3.27 mmol, 66%. LCMS m / z 291.3 [M+H]+.1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-c / 6), characteristic peaks: 8 8.09 (br s, 3H), 7.67 (d, J = 9.5 Hz, 1 H), 6.84 - 6.76 (m, 2H), 3.97 - 3.86 (m, 2H), 2.94 - 2.83 (m, 2H), 2.46 (s, 3H), 1 .98 - 1.89 (m, 2H), 1.61 - 1 .48 (m, 2H), 1 .51 (s, 9H). Preparation P14

[0447] 3-(4-Aminopiperidin-1-yl)-2-methylbenzoic acid, hydrochloride salt (P14)

[0448] Step 1. Synthesis of methyl 3-{4-[(te / Y-butoxycarbonyl)amino]piperidin-1-yl}-2-methylbenzoate (C10).

[0449] To a solution of te / Y-butyl piperidin-4-ylcarbamate (1.00 g, 4.99 mmol) and methyl 3- bromo-2-methylbenzoate (1.14 g, 4.98 mmol) in toluene (20.0 mL) were added tris(dibenzylideneacetone)dipalladium(0) (Pd2(dba)s; 457 mg, 0.499 mmol), 2- dicyclohexylphosphino-2',6'-diisopropoxybiphenyl (RuPhos; 233 mg, 0.499 mmol), and cesium carbonate (4.88 g, 15.0 mmol), whereupon the reaction mixture was stirred at 100 °C for 16 hours. It was then combined with a similar reaction carried out using te / Y-butyl piperidin-4- ylcarbamate (50.0 mg, 0.250 mmol) and filtered; the filtrate was concentrated under reduced pressure, diluted with water (20 mL), and extracted with ethyl acetate (2 x 20 mL). The combined organic layers were washed with saturated aqueous sodium chloride solution (2 x 30 mL), dried over sodium sulfate, filtered, concentrated in vacuo, and purified via silica gel chromatography (Gradient: 0% to 6% ethyl acetate in petroleum ether) to afford C10 as a yellow solid. Combined yield: 1 .30 g, 3.73 mmol, 71%. LCMS m / z 349.2 [M+H]+.1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-c / e), characteristic peaks: 8 7.41 (dd, J = 6.6, 2.4 Hz, 1 H), 7.28 - 7.20 (m, 2H), 6.89 (br d, J = 7.8 Hz, 1 H), 3.80 (s, 3H), 3.03 - 2.93 (m, 2H), 2.69 - 2.58 (m, 2H), 2.37 (s, 3H), 1 .88 - 1 .77 (m, 2H), 1 .62 - 1 .48 (m, 2H), 1 .39 (s, 9H).

[0450] Step 2. Synthesis of 3-{4-[(te / Y-butoxycarbonyl)amino]piperidin-1-yl}-2-methylbenzoic acid (C11).

[0451] To a solution of C10 (1.30 g, 3.73 mmol) in a mixture of tetra hydrofuran (8 mL), methanol (8 mL), and water (4 mL) was added lithium hydroxide monohydrate (783 mg, 18.7 mmol). After the reaction mixture had been stirred at 20 °C for 3 days, it was concentrated in vacuo, diluted with water (30 mL), and acidified to pH 5 by addition of 1 M hydrochloric acid. Filtration provided C11 as a yellow solid; this material was used directly in the following step. Yield: 210 mg, 0.628 mmol, 17%. LCMS m / z 334.9 [M+H]+.

[0452] Step 3. Synthesis of 3-(4-aminopiperidin-1 -yl)-2-methylbenzoic acid, hydrochloride salt (P14).

[0453] A solution of hydrogen chloride in 1 ,4-dioxane (3 mL) was added to a solution of C11 (210 mg, 0.628 mmol) in dichloromethane (3 mL). After the reaction mixture had been stirred at 25 °C for 16 hours, it was concentrated in vacuo to provide P14 as a yellow solid. Yield: 140 mg, 0.517 mmol, 82%. LCMS m / z 235.1 [M+H]+.

[0454] Preparation P15 te / Y-Butyl 4-[4-(D-prolylamino)piperidin-1-yl]benzoate (P15)

[0455] Step 1. Synthesis of (9 / 7-fluoren-9-yl)methyl (2R)-2-({1-[4-(te / Y-butoxycarbonyl)phenyl]piperidin- 4-yl}carbamoyl)pyrrolidine-1 -carboxylate (C12).

[0456] A mixture of 1-{[(9 / 7-fluoren-9-yl)methoxy]carbonyl}-D-proline (2.3 g, 6.8 mmol), P10 (2.0 g, 7.2 mmol), and 1-[3-(dimethylamino)propyl]-3-ethylcarbodiimide hydrochloride (1 .6 g, 8.35 mmol) in dichloromethane (34 mL) was stirred at room temperature for 2 hours. The reaction mixture was then diluted with dichloromethane and washed sequentially with saturated aqueous sodium bicarbonate solution, water, and saturated aqueous sodium chloride solution, dried over sodium sulfate, filtered, and concentrated in vacuo. Silica gel chromatography (Gradient: 0% to 10% methanol in dichloromethane) provided C12 as a light-yellow foam, which comprised a mixture of rotamers according to its1H NMR data. Yield: 2.3 g, 3.9 mmol, 57%. LCMS m / z 596.5 [M+H]+.1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-c / 6) 5 [8.01 (d, J = 7.8 Hz) and 7.84 (d, J = 7.8 Hz), total 1 H], 7.93 - 7.86 (m, 2H), 7.74 - 7.59 (m, 4H), 7.46 - 7.38 (m, 2H), 7.37 - 7.27 (m, 2H), 6.98 - 6.88 (m, 2H), [4.31 - 4.20 (m) and 4.17 - 4.03 (m), total 4H], 3.93 - 3.72 (m, 3H), 3.51 - 3.31 (m, 2H), 3.01 - 2.88 (m, 2H), [2.26 - 2.14 (m) and 2.13 - 2.01 (m), total 1 H], 1 .93 - 1 .67 (m, 5H), 1 .50 (br s, 9H), 1 .50 - 1 .36 (m, 2H).

[0457] Step 2. Synthesis of te / Y-butyl 4-[4-(D-prolylamino)piperidin-1-yl]benzoate (P15).

[0458] A solution of C12 (2.3 g, 3.9 mmol) in / V, / V-dimethylformamide (19 mL) was treated with piperidine (1 .9 mL, 19 mmol) and stirred at room temperature. After 1 hour, the reaction mixture was diluted with ethyl acetate and washed sequentially with saturated aqueous lithium chloride solution, water, and saturated aqueous sodium chloride solution, dried over sodium sulfate, filtered, and concentrated in vacuo. The residue was stirred with diethyl ether and collected via filtration to provide P15 as a white solid (830 mg). The filtrate was concentrated under reduced pressure and purified via silica gel chromatography (Gradient: 0% to 20% methanol in dichloromethane); trituration of the resulting material with diethyl ether afforded additional P15 as a white solid (164 mg). Combined yield: 994 mg, 2.66 mmol, 68%. LCMS m / z 374.3 [M+H]+.1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-cfe) 8 7.83 (d, J = 8.1 Hz, 1 H), 7.70 (d, J = 9.0 Hz, 2H), 6.95 (d, J = 9.0 Hz, 2H), 3.86 - 3.72 (m, 3H), 3.46 (dd, J = 8.7, 5.3 Hz, 1 H), 3.00 - 2.89 (m, 2H), 2.82 - 2.75 (m, 2H), 1 .98 - 1 .87 (m, 1 H), 1 .82 - 1 .71 (m, 2H), 1 .68 - 1 .54 (m, 3H), 1 .51 (s, 9H), 1.51 - 1 .40 (m, 2H).

[0459] Preparation P16

[0460] 2-Methyl-6-[4-(D-prolylamino)piperidin-1 -yl]pyridine-3-carboxylic acid (P16)

[0461] Step 1. Synthesis of tert-butyl 4-({1-[(benzyloxy)carbonyl]-D-prolyl}amino)piperidine-1- carboxylate (C13).

[0462] A mixture of 1-[(benzyloxy)carbonyl]-D-proline (10.0 g, 40.1 mmol), fert-butyl 4- aminopiperidine-1 -carboxylate (8.03 g, 40.1 mmol), and 1-[3-(dimethylamino)propyl]-3- ethylcarbodiimide hydrochloride (10.0 g, 52.2 mmol) in dichloromethane (200 mL) was stirred overnight at room temperature. The reaction mixture was then diluted with dichloromethane and washed sequentially with water and saturated aqueous sodium chloride solution, dried over sodium sulfate, filtered, and concentrated in vacuo. Silica gel chromatography (Gradient: 0% to 10% methanol in dichloromethane) afforded C13 as a tacky white foam, which by1H NMR analysis comprised a mixture of rotamers. Yield: 10.8 g, 25.0 mmol, 62%. LCMS m / z 454.3 [M+Na+],1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-c / 6) 5 7.86 - 7.78 (m, 1 H), 7.40 - 7.25 (m, 5H), [5.11 - 5.00 (m) and 4.94 (d, half of AB quartet, J = 12.9 Hz), total 2H], 4.17 - 4.07 (m, 1 H), 3.89 - 3.59 (m, 3H), 3.51 - 3.34 (m, 2H), 2.92 - 2.69 (m, 2H), 2.20 - 2.00 (m, 1 H), 1 .90 - 1 .71 (m, 3H), [1 .71 - 1 .53 (m) and 1 .52 - 1 .43 (m), total 2H], 1 .39 (s, 9H), 1 .33 - 1 .04 (m, 2H).

[0463] Step 2. Synthesis of benzyl (2R)-2-[(piperidin-4-yl)carbamoyl]pyrrolidine-1-carboxylate, hydrochloride salt (C14).

[0464] To a solution of C13 (10.8 g, 25.0 mmol) in a mixture of 1 ,4-dioxane (30 mL) and dichloromethane (80 mL) was added a solution of hydrogen chloride in 1 ,4-dioxane (4.0 M; 62.6 mL, 250 mmol), whereupon the reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature overnight. After removal of solvents in vacuo, the residue was stirred in a small amount of diethyl ether for 30 minutes and filtered; the filter cake was washed with diethyl ether to provide C14 as a white solid (9.13 g). This material comprised a mixture of rotamers, according to its1H NMR; a portion of it was progressed directly to the following step. LCMS m / z 332.3 [M+H]+.1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-cfe), characteristic peaks: 8 8.16 - 8.07 (m, 1 H), 7.43 - 7.25 (m, 5H), [5.13 - 5.00 (m) and 4.96 (d, half of AB quartet, J = 13.0 Hz), total 2H], [4.22 - 4.09 (m) and 3.96 - 3.84 (m), total 2H], 3.84 - 3.72 (m, 1 H).

[0465] Step 3. Synthesis of 6-[4-({1-[(benzyloxy)carbonyl]-D-prolyl}amino)piperidin-1-yl]-2- methylpyridine-3-carboxylic acid (C15).

[0466] A mixture of C14 (from the previous step; 2.5 g, <6.8 mmol), 6-fluoro-2-methylpyridine-3- carboxylic acid (1.05 g, 6.77 mmol), and A / , / V-diisopropylethylamine (3.55 mL, 20.4 mmol) in dimethyl sulfoxide (34.0 mL) was heated for 18 hours at 100 °C. Addition of saturated aqueous ammonium chloride solution (20 mL) was followed by dilution with water (20 mL), and the aqueous layer was extracted with dichloromethane (2 x 40 mL). The combined organic layers were dried over sodium sulfate, filtered, and concentrated under reduced pressure. Chromatography on silica gel (Eluents: 10% ethyl acetate in dichloromethane followed by 10% methanol in dichloromethane) provided a gum, which was dissolved in methanol and treated with activated carbon (600 mg). After this mixture had been stirred for 1 hour at room temperature, it was filtered; concentration of the filtrate in vacuo afforded C15 as a solid. This material contained a mixture of rotamers by1H NMR analysis. Yield: 1 .72 g, 3.69 mmol, 54% over 2 steps. LCMS m / z 467.4 [M+H]+.1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-c / 6) 5 12.25 (s, 1 H), 7.93 (d, J = 9.0 Hz, 1 H), 7.87 - 7.78 (m, 1 H), 7.40 - 7.24 (m, 5H), 6.74 - 6.65 (m, 1 H), [5.1 1 - 5.00 (m) and 4.94 (d, half of AB quartet, J = 13.0 Hz), total 2H], 4.38 - 4.20 (m, 2H), 4.16 - 4.08 (m, 1 H), 3.90 - 3.74 (m, 1 H), 3.51 - 3.33 (m, 2H, assumed; partially obscured by water peak), 3.10 - 2.92 (m, 2H), 2.59 (s, 3H), 2.19 - 2.01 (m, 1 H), 1 .91 - 1 .54 (m, 5H), 1.43 - 1 .18 (m, 2H).

[0467] Step 4. Synthesis of 2-methyl-6-[4-(D-prolylamino)piperidin-1-yl]pyridine-3-carboxylic acid (P16).

[0468] A mixture of C15 (1.44 g, 3.09 mmol) and palladium on carbon (10%, 821 mg, 0.771 mmol) in methanol (15 mL) was hydrogenated for 24 hours at 80 psi and room temperature. After the reaction mixture had been filtered through a pad of diatomaceous earth, the filtrate was concentrated in vacuo to afford P16 as a gum. Yield: 742 mg, 2.23 mmol, 72%. LCMS m / z 333.4 [M+H]+.1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-c / 6) 5 7.92 (d, J = 9.0 Hz, 1 H), 7.88 (br d, J = 8.2 Hz, 1 H), 6.68 (d, J = 9.0 Hz, 1 H), 4.37 - 4.26 (m, 2H), 3.89 - 3.76 (m, 1 H), 3.51 (dd, J = 8.7, 5.4 Hz, 1 H), 3.06 - 2.95 (m, 2H), 2.81 (t, J = 6.5 Hz, 2H), 2.58 (s, 3H), 2.00 - 1 .89 (m, 1 H), 1 .81 - 1 .71 (m, 2H), 1 .70 - 1 .54 (m, 3H), 1 .45 - 1 .31 (m, 2H).

[0469] Example 1

[0470] 2-Methyl-6-(4-{[1 -({[4-(trifluoromethoxy)phenyl]methyl}carbamoyl)-D-prolyl]amino}piperidin-1 - yl)pyridine-3-carboxylic acid (1)

[0471] 1 ,1 ’-Carbonyldiimidazole (10.2 mg, 62.9 pmol) was added to a solution of 1-[4- (trifluoromethoxy)phenyl]methanamine (12 mg, 63 pmol) in dichloromethane (0.3 mL). After the reaction mixture had been stirred for 30 minutes, P16 (20.9 mg, 62.9 pmol) was added, whereupon the reaction mixture was heated at 45 °C for 20 minutes. It was then concentrated in vacuo and purified using reversed-phase HPLC (Column: Waters Sunfire C18, 19 x 100 mm, 5 pm; Mobile phase A: water containing 0.05% trifluoroacetic acid; Mobile phase B: acetonitrile containing 0.05% trifluoroacetic acid; Gradient: 5% to 95% B over 8.54 minutes, followed by 95% B for 1 .46 minutes; Flow rate: 25 mL / minute) to provide 2-methy l-6-(4-{[1 -({[4- (trifluoromethoxy)phenyl]methyl}carbamoyl)-D-prolyl]amino}piperidin-1 -yl)pyridine-3-carboxylic acid (1). This material comprised a mixture of rotamers, according to the1H NMR spectrum. Yield: 22.6 mg, 41.1 pmol, 65%. LCMS m / z 550.6 [M+H]+.1H NMR (600 MHz, DMSO-c / 6), characteristic peaks, some peaks are attributed to major or minor rotamer: 8 8.15 (major, br s, 1 H), 7.92 (major, d, J = 8.9 Hz, 1 H), 7.51 (minor, AB quartet, JAB = 8.2 Hz, AVAB= 80.1 Hz, 4H), 7.31 (major, AB quartet, AB = 8.3 Hz, AVAB = 70.8 Hz, 4H), 6.80 (major, t, J = 6.0 Hz, 1 H), 6.69 (major, d, J = 9.0 Hz, 1 H), [4.33 - 4.22 (m), 4.19 (dd, component of ABX system, J = 15.7, 6.0 Hz), 4.16 - 4.11 (m), and 4.10 - 4.04 (m), total 5H], 3.87 - 3.77 (m, 1 H), 3.08 - 3.00 (m, 2H), 2.58 (major, s, 3H), 2.02 - 1 .94 (m, 1 H), 1 .88 - 1 .76 (m, 3H), 1 .74 - 1 .66 (m, 2H), 1 .39 - 1 .28 (m, 2H).

[0472] Example 2

[0473] 6-{4-[(1-{[3-Fluoro-4-(propan-2-yl)phenyl]carbamoyl}-D-prolyl)amino]piperidin-1 -yl}-2- methylpyridine-3-carboxylic acid (2)

[0474] 3-Fluoro-4-(propan-2-yl)aniline, hydrochloride salt (1 14 mg, 0.601 mmol) and N,N- diisopropylethylamine (0.105 mL, 0.603 mmol) were added to a 0 °C solution of 1 ,1 ’- carbonyldiimidazole (97.6 mg, 0.602 mmol) in acetonitrile (6.0 mL). After the reaction mixture had been stirred at 0 °C for 1 hour, P16 (200 mg, 0.602 mmol) was added, and stirring was continued at room temperature for 4 hours. The reaction mixture was concentrated under reduced pressure and partitioned between water and dichloromethane; the aqueous layer was extracted twice with dichloromethane, and the combined organic layers were washed with saturated aqueous sodium chloride solution, dried over sodium sulfate, filtered, and concentrated in vacuo. The residue was subjected to silica gel chromatography (Gradient: 0% to 10% methanol in dichloromethane), and the resulting material was combined with the product of a similar reaction carried out using P16 (114 mg, 0.343 mmol). Purification via reversed- phase HPLC (Column: Phenomenex Biphenyl, 21 .2 x 250 mm, 5 pm; Mobile phase A: water containing 0.1% formic acid; Mobile phase B: acetonitrile containing 0.1% formic acid; Gradient: 20% B for 1 .5 minutes, followed by 20% to 80% B over 10 minutes; Flow rate: 27 mL / minute) afforded 6-{4-[(1-{[3-fluoro-4-(propan-2-yl)phenyl]carbamoyl}-D-prolyl)amino]piperidin-1-yl}-2- methylpyridine-3-carboxylic acid (2). Combined yield: 70 mg, 0.137 mmol, 14%. LCMS m / z 512.5 [M+H]+.1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-cfe) 8 8.26 (s, 1 H), 7.92 (d, J = 8.9 Hz, 1 H), 7.78 (br d, J = 8.0 Hz, 1 H), 7.39 (dd, J = 13.7, 2.1 Hz, 1 H), 7.21 (dd, component of ABX system, J = 8.5, 2.1 Hz, 1 H), 7.15 (dd, component of ABX system, J = 8.6, 8.6 Hz, 1 H), 6.69 (d, J = 9.0 Hz, 1 H), 4.37 - 4.27 (m, 2H), 4.25 (dd, J = 8.3, 3.4 Hz, 1 H), 3.91 - 3.77 (m, 1 H), 3.62 - 3.52 (m, 1 H), 3.46 - 3.36 (m, 1 H, assumed; partially obscured by water peak), 3.12 - 2.96 (m, 3H), 2.58 (s, 3H), 2.12 - 1 .98 (m, 1 H), 1 .97 - 1 .84 (m, 2H), 1 .84 - 1 .68 (m, 3H), 1 .45 - 1 .28 (m, 2H), 1 .18 (d, J = 6.9 Hz, 6H).

[0475] Example 3

[0476] 3-Fluoro-4-{4-[(1-{[3-fluoro-4-(propan-2-yl)phenyl]carbamoyl}-D-prolyl)amino]piperidin-1- yljbenzoic acid (3)

[0477] Step 1. Synthesis of tert-butyl 3-fluoro-4-{4-[(1-{[3-fluoro-4-(propan-2-yl)phenyl]carbamoyl}-D- prolyl)amino]piperidin-1-yl}benzoate (C16).

[0478] 1-[3-(Dimethylamino)propyl]-3-ethylcarbodiimide hydrochloride (254 mg, 1.32 mmol) was added to a mixture of P2 (300 mg, 1 .02 mmol), P11 (330 mg, 1.12 mmol), and triethylamine (0.284 mL, 2.04 mmol) in dichloromethane (5.1 mL). After 3 hours, LCMS indicated conversion to C16: LCMS m / z 571 .6 [M+H]+. The reaction mixture was washed with 1 M hydrochloric acid; the organic layer was treated with methanol (approximately 0.5 mL), washed with saturated aqueous sodium bicarbonate solution, dried over sodium sulfate, filtered, and concentrated in vacuo. Chromatography on silica gel (Gradient: 0% to 10% methanol in dichloromethane) afforded C16 as a solid. Yield: 210 mg, 0.368 mol, 36%.1H NMR (600 MHz, DMSO-cfe) 8 8.27 (s, 1 H), 7.84 (d, J = 7.9 Hz, 1 H), 7.62 (dd, J = 8.4, 2.0 Hz, 1 H), 7.51 (dd, J = 13.9, 2.0 Hz, 1 H), 7.40 (dd, J = 13.6, 2.1 Hz, 1 H), 7.22 (dd, component of ABX system, J = 8.6,

[0479] 2.1 Hz, 1 H), 7.15 (dd, component of ABX system, J = 8.7, 8.7 Hz, 1 H), 7.07 (t, J = 8.7 Hz, 1 H), 4.27 (dd, J = 8.4, 3.5 Hz, 1 H), 3.77 - 3.69 (m, 1 H), 3.61 - 3.55 (m, 1 H), 3.50 - 3.39 (m, 3H), 3.07 (septet, J = 6.9 Hz, 1 H), 2.91 - 2.83 (m, 2H), 2.11 - 2.02 (m, 1 H), 1 .96 - 1 .85 (m, 2H), 1.85 - 1.77 (m, 3H), 1.63 - 1.52 (m, 2H), 1.52 (s, 9H), 1 .18 (d, J = 6.9 Hz, 6H).

[0480] Step 2. Synthesis of 3-fluoro-4-{4-[(1 -{[3-fluoro-4-(propan-2-yl)phenyl]carbamoyl}-D- prolyl)amino]piperidin-1-yl}benzoic acid (3).

[0481] Methanesulfonic acid (0.239 mL, 3.68 mmol) was added to a solution of C16 (210 mg, 0.368 mmol) in acetonitrile (1 .8 mL); after 1 .5 hours, LCMS analysis indicated conversion to 3: LCMS m / z 515.6 [M+H]+. After an additional 35 minutes, the reaction mixture was concentrated in vacuo; the residue was treated with water (3 mL), and the resulting precipitate was isolated via filtration and washed with water, providing 3-fluoro-4-{4-[(1-{[3-fluoro-4-(propan-2- yl)phenyl]carbamoyl}-D-prolyl)amino]piperidin-1-yl}benzoic acid (3) as a white solid. Yield: 152 mg, 0.295 mmol, 80%.1H NMR (600 MHz, DMSO-c / 6) 8 12.77 (br s, 1 H), 8.27 (s, 1 H), 7.83 (d, J = 7.9 Hz, 1 H), 7.66 (dd, J = 8.5, 2.0 Hz, 1 H), 7.54 (dd, J = 13.8, 2.0 Hz, 1 H), 7.40 (dd, J = 13.6,

[0482] 2.2 Hz, 1 H), 7.22 (dd, component of ABX system, J = 8.5, 2.2 Hz, 1 H), 7.15 (dd, component of ABX system, J = 8.6, 8.6 Hz, 1 H), 7.08 (t, J = 8.8 Hz, 1 H), 4.27 (dd, J = 8.3, 3.5 Hz, 1 H), 3.77 - 3.69 (m, 1 H), 3.61 - 3.55 (m, 1 H), 3.52 - 3.38 (m, 3H, assumed; largely obscured by water peak), 3.07 (septet, J = 6.9 Hz, 1 H), 2.91 - 2.84 (m, 2H), 2.11 - 2.02 (m, 1 H), 1 .97 - 1 .85 (m, 2H), 1 .84 - 1 .77 (m, 3H), 1 .63 - 1 .51 (m, 2H), 1 .18 (d, J = 6.9 Hz, 6H).

[0483] Example 4

[0484] (2 / ?)-A / 2-[1 -(4-Carbamoyl-2,6-difluorophenyl)piperidin-4-yl]-A / 1-[4-(propan-2-yl)phenyl]pyrrolidine- 1 ,2-dicarboxamide (4)

[0485] To a 25 °C mixture of P12 (80.0 mg, 0.313 mmol) and P1 (95.3 mg, 0.345 mmol) were added chloro(dimethylamino)- / V, / V-dimethylmethaniminium hexafluorophosphate (176 mg, 0.627 mmol) and 1-methyl-1 / - / -imidazole (206 mg, 2.51 mmol). / V, / V-Dimethylformamide (1 .5 mL) was then added, and the reaction mixture was stirred at 25 °C for 2 hours, whereupon it was poured into water (10 mL) and extracted with ethyl acetate (3 x 5 mL). After the combined organic layers had been washed with saturated aqueous sodium chloride solution (2 x 5 mL), dried over sodium sulfate, filtered, and concentrated, the residue was purified via reversed- phase HPLC (Column: C18, 40 x 150 mm; Mobile phase A: water containing 0.225% formic acid; Mobile phase B: acetonitrile; Gradient: 36% to 56% B; Flow rate: 60 mL / minute) to provide (2 / ?)-A / 2-[1 -(4-carbamoyl-2,6-difluorophenyl)piperidin-4-yl]-A / 1-[4-(propan-2-yl)phenyl]pyrrolidine- 1 ,2-dicarboxamide (4) as a white solid. Yield: 37.5 mg, 73.0 pmol, 23%. LCMS m / z 514.3 [M+H]+.1H NMR (400 MHz, methanol-c / 4) 5 8.04 (s, 1 H), 7.49 - 7.39 (m, 2H), 7.33 - 7.27 (m, 2H), 7.13 (d, half of AB quartet, J = 8.5 Hz, 2H), 4.39 (dd, J = 8.3, 3.7 Hz, 1 H), 3.91 - 3.79 (m, 1 H), 3.73 - 3.64 (m, 1 H), 3.57 - 3.48 (m, 1 H), 3.43 - 3.34 (m, 2H), 3.25 - 3.15 (m, 2H), 2.85 (septet, J = 6.9 Hz, 1 H), 2.29 - 2.16 (m, 1 H), 2.14 - 1.87 (m, 5H), 1.75 - 1.60 (m, 2H), 1.22 (d, J = 6.9 Hz, 6H). Example 5

[0486] 4-{4-[(1 -{[4-(Trifluoromethyl)phenoxy]acetyl}-D-prolyl)amino]piperidin-1-yl}benzoic acid (5)

[0487] A vial was sequentially charged with P15 (37.3 mg, 0.100 mmol), [4- (trifluoromethyl)phenoxy]acetic acid (22.0 mg, 99.9 pmol), 1-[3-(dimethylamino)propyl]-3- ethylcarbodiimide hydrochloride (24.9 mg, 0.130 mmol), and dichloromethane (0.5 mL), whereupon the reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 18 hours. Dichloromethane (3 mL) and water (2 mL) were added; the organic layer was then filtered through a cartridge packed with magnesium sulfate. The eluent was concentrated under reduced pressure and dissolved in 1 ,1 ,1 ,3,3,3-hexafluoropropan-2-ol (0.5 mL). After addition of methanesulfonic acid (9.61 mg, 0.100 mmol), this reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 30 minutes and concentrated in vacuo. Reversed-phase HPLC (Column: Waters Sunfire C18, 19 x 100 mm, 5 pm; Mobile phase A: water containing 0.05% trifluoroacetic acid; Mobile phase B: acetonitrile containing 0.05% trifluoroacetic acid; Gradient: 25% to 45% B over 8.5 minutes, then 45% to 95% B over 0.5 minutes, then 95% B for 1 .0 minute; Flow rate: 25 mL / minute) afforded 4-{4-[(1 -{[4-(trifluoromethyl)phenoxy]acetyl}-D-prolyl)amino]piperidin-1 -yljbenzoic acid (5). By1H NMR analysis, this material comprised a mixture of rotamers. Yield: 27.6 mg, 53.1 pmol, 53%. LCMS m / z 520.3 [M+H]+.1H NMR (600 MHz, DMSO-c / 6), integrations are approximate: 8 12.21 (br s, <1 H), [8.11 (d, J = 7.8 Hz) and 7.72 (d, J = 8.0 Hz), total 1 H], 7.74 (br d, J = 9.0 Hz, 2H), [7.63 (d, J = 8.7 Hz) and 7.60 (d, J = 8.6 Hz), total 2H], [7.09 (d, J = 8.5 Hz) and 7.04 (d, J = 8.6 Hz), total 2H], [6.95 (d, J = 9.0 Hz) and 6.94 (d, J = 9.0 Hz), total 2H], [4.89 (AB quartet, JAB = 15.7 Hz, AVAB= 18.6 Hz), 4.84 (d, J = 15.3 Hz), 4.44 - 4.39 (m), and 4.22 (dd, J = 8.6, 3.8 Hz), total 3H], 3.90 - 3.74 (m, 3H), 3.63 - 3.56 (m, 1 H), 3.54 - 3.46 (m, 1 H), 2.99 - 2.91 (m, 2H), [2.26 - 2.17 (m) and 2.09 - 1 .99 (m), total 1 H], [1 .99 - 1 .84 (m) and 1 .82 - 1 .64 (m), total 5H], 1.51 - 1 .36 (m, 2H). Example 6

[0488] 3-{4-[(1-{[3-Fluoro-4-(propan-2-yl)phenyl]carbamoyl}-D-prolyl)amino]piperidin-1 -yl}-2- methylbenzoic acid (6)

[0489] Chloro(dimethylamino)- / V, / V-dimethylmethaniminium hexafluorophosphate (120 mg, 0.428 mmol) and 1-methyl-1 / - / -imidazole (140 mg, 1 .71 mmol) were added to a mixture of P14 (50.0 mg, 0.213 mmol) and P2 (62.8 mg, 0.213 mmol). / V, / V-Dimethylformamide (2.0 mL) was then added and the reaction mixture was stirred at 25 °C for 16 hours, whereupon it was poured into water (20 mL) and acidified to pH 5 by addition of 1 M hydrochloric acid. The resulting precipitate was collected via filtration and purified using reversed-phase HPLC (Column: C18, 40 x 150 mm; Mobile phase A: water containing 0.05% ammonium hydroxide and 10 mM ammonium bicarbonate; Mobile phase B: acetonitrile; Gradient: 8% to 48% B; Flow rate: 60 mL / minute) to provide 3-{4-[(1 -{[3-fluoro-4-(propan-2-yl)phenyl]carbamoyl}-D- prolyl)amino]piperidin-1 -yl}-2-methylbenzoic acid (6) as a white solid. Yield: 7.6 mg, 15 pmol, 7%. LCMS m / z 511 .4 [M+H]+.1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-c / 6), characteristic peaks: 8 8.29 (s, 1 H), 7.84 (d, J = 7.8 Hz, 1 H), 7.45 - 7.35 (m, 2H), 7.23 (dd, component of ABX system, J = 8.5, 2.1 Hz, 1 H), 7.21 - 7.12 (m, 3H), 4.29 (dd, J = 8.3, 3.4 Hz, 1 H), 3.75 - 3.63 (m, 1 H), 3.63 - 3.54 (m, 1 H, assumed; partially obscured by water peak), 3.06 (septet, J = 6.9 Hz, 1 H), 3.02 - 2.92 (m, 2H), 2.71 - 2.60 (m, 2H), 2.39 (s, 3H), 2.13 - 2.01 (m, 1 H), 1.99 - 1.75 (m, 5H), 1.69 - 1.52 (m, 2H), 1 .17 (d, J = 6.9 Hz, 6H). Example 7

[0490] A / -[4-(T rifluoromethyl)phenyl]glycyl- / V-[1 -(4-carboxyphenyl)piperidin-4-yl]-D-prolinamide (7)

[0491] Step 1. Synthesis of / V-[4-(trifluoromethyl)phenyl]glycyl- / V-{1 -[4-(te / Y- butoxycarbonyl)phenyl]piperidin-4-yl}-D-prolinamide (C17).

[0492] A solution of P7 (39 mg, 0.12 mmol), P10 (34 mg, 0.12 mmol), and 3- {[(ethylimino)methylidene]amino}-A / -methylpropan-1 -amine hydrochloride (26 mg, 0.15 mmol) were stirred overnight in dichloromethane (1 mL) at room temperature. After the reaction mixture had been diluted with water and dichloromethane, the aqueous layer was extracted twice with dichloromethane. The combined organic layers were washed with saturated aqueous sodium chloride solution, dried over sodium sulfate, filtered, and concentrated in vacuo; trituration of the residue using heptane containing a small amount of diethyl ether provided C17 as an off-white solid. This material was progressed directly to the following step. Yield: 38 mg, 66 pmol, 55%. LCMS m / z 575.6 [M+H]+.

[0493] Step 2. Synthesis of / V-[4-(trifluoromethyl)phenyl]glycyl- / V-[1 -(4-carboxyphenyl)piperidin-4-yl]-D- prolinamide (7).

[0494] Methanesulfonic acid (5.1 pL, 79 pmol) was added to a solution of C17 (38 mg, 66 pmol) in 1 ,1 ,1 ,3,3,3-hexafluoropropan-2-ol (0.4 mL), whereupon the reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 1 hour. It was then added to water, acidified by addition of 1 M hydrochloric acid, and extracted twice with ethyl acetate. The combined organic layers were washed with saturated aqueous sodium chloride solution, dried over sodium sulfate, filtered, concentrated in vacuo, and purified using reversed-phase HPLC (Column: Waters Sunfire C18, 19 x 100 mm, 5 pm; Mobile phase A: water containing 0.05% trifluoroacetic acid; Mobile phase B: acetonitrile containing 0.05% trifluoroacetic acid; Gradient: 5% to 95% B over 8.54 minutes, followed by 95% B for 1 .46 minutes; Flow rate: 25 mL / minute) to afford A / -[4- (trifluoromethyl)phenyl]glycyl-A / -[1-(4-carboxyphenyl)piperidin-4-yl]-D-prolinamide (7); this material consisted of a mixture of rotamers, according to the1H NMR spectrum. Yield: 9.3 mg, 18 pmol, 27%. LCMS m / z 519.5 [M+H]+.1H NMR (600 MHz, DMSO-c / 6), characteristic peaks, integrations are approximate: 8 7.77 - 7.72 (m, 2H), 7.35 (d, J = 8.5 Hz, 2H), 6.98 - 6.92 (m, <2H), [6.73 (d, J = 8.4 Hz) and 6.64 (d, J = 8.5 Hz), total 2H], [4.40 (dd, J = 8.4, 3.2 Hz) and 4.24 (dd, J = 8.6, 3.7 Hz), total 1 H], 3.93 (AB quartet, JAB = 17.0 Hz, AVAB= 14.8 Hz, 2H), 3.89 - 3.73 (m, 3H), 3.00 - 2.91 (m, 2H), 1 .54 - 1 .37 (m, 2H).

[0495] Example 8

[0496] 4-{4-[(1-{[3-Fluoro-4-(propan-2-yl)phenyl]carbamoyl}-D-prolyl)amino]piperidin-1-yl}-2- methylbenzoic acid (8)

[0497] 2) CH3SO3H

[0498] A mixture of P2 (29.4 mg, 99.9 pmol), P13 (32.7 mg, 100 pmol), and 1-[3- (dimethylamino)propyl]-3-ethylcarbodiimide hydrochloride (24.9 mg, 0.130 mmol) was treated with dichloromethane (0.4 mL), followed by triethylamine (13.9 pL, 99.7 pmol). The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 15 minutes, whereupon it was diluted with dichloromethane (2 mL) and washed with water (2 mL). After the organic layer had been filtered through a cartridge packed with magnesium sulfate, the eluent was concentrated under reduced pressure. The residue was dissolved in 1 ,1 ,1 ,3,3,3-hexafluoropropan-2-ol (0.4 mL), treated with methanesulfonic acid (6.49 pL, 0.100 mmol), stirred at room temperature for 15 minutes, and concentrated in vacuo. Purification via reversed-phase HPLC (Column: Waters Sunfire C18, 19 x 100 mm, 5 pm; Mobile phase A: water containing 0.05% trifluoroacetic acid; Mobile phase B: acetonitrile containing 0.05% trifluoroacetic acid; Gradient: 30% to 50% B over

[0499] 8.5 minutes, then 50% to 95% B over 0.5 minutes, followed by 95% B for 1 .0 minute; Flow rate: 25 mL / minute) afforded 4-{4-[(1 -{[3-fluoro-4-(propan-2-yl)phenyl]carbamoyl}-D- prolyl)amino]piperidin-1-yl}-2-methylbenzoic acid (8). Yield: 5.5 mg, 10.8 pmol, 11%. LCMS m / z

[0500] 511.5 [M+H]+.1H NMR (600 MHz, DMSO-c / 6), characteristic peaks: 8 8.26 (s, 1 H), 7.78 (d, J = 7.9 Hz, 1 H), 7.73 (d, J = 9.5 Hz, 1 H), 7.39 (dd, J = 13.7, 2.1 Hz, 1 H), 7.21 (dd, component of ABX system, J = 8.4, 2.1 Hz, 1 H), 7.15 (dd, component of ABX system J = 8.6, 8.6 Hz, 1 H), 6.79 - 6.74 (m, 2H), 4.24 (dd, J = 8.4, 3.5 Hz, 1 H), 3.87 - 3.73 (m, 3H), 3.60 - 3.53 (m, 1 H, assumed; partially obscured by water peak), 3.06 (septet, J = 6.9 Hz, 1 H), 2.97 - 2.88 (m, 2H), 2.48 (s, 3H), 2.09 - 2.00 (m, 1 H), 1 .95 - 1 .83 (m, 2H), 1 .83 - 1 .76 (m, 1 H), 1 .76 - 1 .69 (m, 2H), 1 .51 - 1 .37 (m, 2H), 1 .18 (d, J = 6.9 Hz, 6H).

[0501] Example 9

[0502] 6-Methyl-5-{4-[(1 -{[4-(propan-2-yl)phenyl]carbamoyl}-D-prolyl)amino]piperidin-1 -yl}pyridine-2- carboxylic acid (9)

[0503] A vial containing a mixture of P9 (35.8 mg, 0.100 mmol) and [(2-di-terf-butylphosphino- 2',4',6'-triisopropyl-1 ,1 '-biphenyl)-2-(2'-amino-1 ,1 '-biphenyl)] palladium^ I) methanesulfonate (t- BuXPhos Pd G3; 7.94 mg, 10.0 pmol) was evacuated and then filled with nitrogen. After this evacuation / nitrogen fill had been carried out 3 times, a solution of te / Y-butyl 5-bromo-6- methylpyridine-2-carboxylate (27.2 mg, 0.100 mmol) in dimethyl sulfoxide (0.5 mL) was added, followed by 2-te / Y-butyl-1 ,1 ,3,3-tetramethylguanidine (BTMG; 34.3 mg, 0.200 mmol). After the reaction mixture had been stirred in an aluminum reaction block at 40 °C for 18 hours, it was diluted with water (2 mL). The aqueous layer was extracted with ethyl acetate (4 mL); the organic layer was filtered through a cartridge packed with magnesium sulfate and the filtrate was concentrated in vacuo. The residue was dissolved in dichloromethane (0.5 mL), treated with trifluoroacetic acid (0.153 mL, 228 mg, 2.00 mmol), and stirred at room temperature for 18 hours. Removal of solvent under reduced pressure was followed by reversed-phase HPLC (Column: Waters Sunfire C18, 19 x 100 mm, 5 pm; Mobile phase A: water containing 0.05% trifluoroacetic acid; Mobile phase B: acetonitrile containing 0.05% trifluoroacetic acid; Gradient: 5% to 50% B over 8.5 minutes, then 50% to 95% B over 0.5 minutes, followed by 95% B for 1 .0 minute; Flow rate: 25 mL / minute), affording 6-methyl-5-{4-[(1-{[4-(propan-2- yl)phenyl]carbamoyl}-D-prolyl)amino]piperidin-1-yl}pyridine-2-carboxylic acid (9). Yield: 6.8 mg, 14 pmol, 14%. LCMS m / z 494.5 [M+H]+.1H NMR (600 MHz, DMSO-c / 6), characteristic peaks: 8 8.07 (s, 1 H), 7.88 - 7.82 (m, 2H), 7.46 (d, J = 8.4 Hz, 1 H), 7.40 - 7.36 (m, 2H), 7.09 (d, J = 8.5 Hz, 2H), 4.28 (dd, J = 8.5, 3.5 Hz, 1 H), 2.80 (septet, J = 6.9 Hz, 1 H), 2.75 (br t, J = 1 1 .7 Hz, 2H), 2.47 (s, 3H), 2.10-2.02 (m, 1H), 1.97- 1.86 (m, 2H), 1.86- 1.79 (m, 3H), 1.67- 1.55 (m,

[0504] 2H), 1.16 (d, J = 6.9 Hz, 6H)

[0505] Table 1. Method of synthesis, structure, and physicochemical data for Examples 10-39. The examples below were made from analogous processes to the Example(s) identified and from appropriate analogous starting materials.

[0506] 1 . Reaction of P9 with 4-bromo-3-fluorobenzoic acid was carried out in the presence of [(2-di- te / Y-butylphosphino-2',4',6'-triisopropyl-1 ,1'-biphenyl)-2-(2'-amino-1 ,1 '-biphenyl)] palladium^ I) methanesulfonate (f-BuXPhos Pd G3) and 2-te / Y-butyl-1 ,1 ,3,3-tetramethylguanidine (BTMG) to provide Example 11 . 2. Reaction of P9 with 6-fluoro-2-methylpyridine-3-carboxylic acid and N,N- diisopropylethylamine afforded Example 12.

[0507] 3. In this case, 4-iodo-3-methylbenzoic acid was used.

[0508] 4. Treatment of 6-fluoro-2-methylpyridine-3-carboxylic acid with 1 ,1 -di-tert-butoxy-A / ,A / - dimethylmethanamine and te / Y-butanol provided the requisite te / Y-butyl 6-fluoro-2- methylpyridine-3-carboxylate.

[0509] 5. Amide formation between P3 and te / Y-butyl 4-aminopiperidine-1 -carboxylate was carried out using 1-[3-(dimethylamino)propyl]-3-ethylcarbodiimide hydrochloride, N,N- diisopropylethylamine, and 4-(dimethylamino)pyridine. The resulting material was deprotected using trifluoroacetic acid to afford the requisite (2R)-A / 1-[3-methyl-4-(propan-2-yl)phenyl]-A / 2- (piperidin-4-yl)pyrrolidine-1 ,2-dicarboxamide.

[0510] 6. (2R)-A / 1-[3-Methyl-4-(propan-2-yl)phenyl]-A / 2-(piperidin-4-yl)pyrrolidine-1 ,2-dicarboxamide (see footnote 5) was reacted with te / Y-butyl 6-fluoro-2-methylpyridine-3-carboxylate (see footnote 4) in the presence of A / , / V-diisopropylethylamine; deprotection of the product with hydrogen chloride provided Example 14.

[0511] 7. Reaction of P15 with 1-[4-(trifluoromethoxy)phenyl]methanamine, bis(trichloromethyl) carbonate, and 4-(dimethylamino)pyridine, followed by deprotection using trifluoroacetic acid, afforded Example 15.

[0512] 8. Analytical conditions. Column: Waters Atlantis C18, 4.6 x 50 mm, 5 pm; Mobile phase A: water containing 0.05% trifluoroacetic acid (v / v); Mobile phase B: acetonitrile containing 0.05% trifluoroacetic acid (v / v); Gradient: 5.0% to 95% B over 4.0 minutes, then 95% B for 1 .0 minute; Flow rate: 2 mL / minute.

[0513] 9. Potassium carbonate-mediated reaction of te / Y-butyl 3-bromo-4-fluorobenzoate and te / Y-butyl piperidin-4-ylcarbamate, followed by deprotection using hydrogen chloride, provided the requisite te / Y-butyl 4-(4-aminopiperidin-1-yl)-3-bromobenzoate.

[0514] 10. The requisite 4-(4-aminopiperidin-1 -yl)-3-ethylbenzoic acid was synthesized from methyl 4- bromo-3-ethylbenzoate, using the method described in Preparation P14.

[0515] 11 . Potassium carbonate-mediated reaction of benzyl piperidin-4-ylcarbamate with te / Y-butyl 3,4,5-trifluorobenzoate provided te / Y-butyl 4-(4-{[(benzyloxy)carbonyl]amino}piperidin-1-yl)-3,5- difluorobenzoate. This material was deprotected by reaction with 1 ,1 ,3,3-tetramethyldisiloxane and palladium^ I) acetate to afford the requisite te / Y-butyl 4-(4-aminopiperidin-1 -yl)-3,5- difluorobenzoate.

[0516] 12. In this case, the final deprotection was carried out using trifluoroacetic acid and anisole.

[0517] 13. 1 -[3-(Dimethylamino)propyl]-3-ethylcarbodiimide hydrochloride-mediated reaction of P10 and 1-(te / Y-butoxycarbonyl)-D-proline, followed by deprotection with hydrogen chloride, provided 4-[4-(D-prolylamino)piperidin-1-yl]benzoic acid. This material was reacted with 4- cyclopropylaniline and 1 ,T-carbonyldiimidazole in the presence of triethylamine to afford Example 28.

[0518] 14. 3-Methyl-4-(trifluoromethyl)aniline was reacted with bis(trichloromethyl) carbonate and 4- (dimethylamino)pyridine; subsequent addition of P15, followed by deprotection with trifluoroacetic acid, provided Example 30.

[0519] 15. 6-Bromo-5-fluoropyridin-3-amine and 4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-2-(prop-1-en-2-yl)-1 ,3,2- dioxaborolane were coupled using tetrakis(triphenylphosphine)palladium(0) and potassium carbonate. Hydrogenation of the product over palladium on carbon afforded the requisite 5- fluoro-6-(propan-2-yl)pyridin-3-amine. 16. 5-Fluoro-6-(propan-2-yl)pyridin-3-amine (see footnote 15) was reacted with bis(trichloromethyl) carbonate and 4-(dimethylamino)pyridine; subsequent addition of P16 provided Example 32.

[0520] 17. [4-(Propan-2-yl)phenoxy]acetic acid was reacted with 2-[2-oxo-1 (2 / 7)-pyridyl]-1 ,1 ,3,3- tetramethyluronium tetrafluoroborate (TPTU) and A / , / V-diisopropylethylamine; subsequent addition of P15, followed by deprotection with methanesulfonic acid, provided Example 35.

[0521] 18. Coupling of benzyl piperidin-4-ylcarbamate with te / Y-butyl 4-bromo-3-methylbenzoate was carried out using (2-dicyclohexylphosphino-2',6'-diisopropoxy-1 ,1 '-biphenyl)[2-(2'-amino-1 ,T- biphenyl)]palladium(l I) methanesulfonate (RuPhos Pd G3) and cesium carbonate. The resulting te / Y-butyl 4-(4-{[(benzyloxy)carbonyl]amino}piperidin-1 -yl)-3-methylbenzoate was deprotected using palladium hydroxide on aluminum oxide in a flow hydrogenation apparatus to afford the requisite te / Y-butyl 4-(4-aminopiperidin-1-yl)-3-methylbenzoate.

[0522] Prophetic deuterated analogs (PDAs) of certain compounds of the invention

[0523] Example X-1 : Some Prophetic deuterated analogs (PDA) of Example 2

[0524] The compounds provided in Table X-1 are some prophetic deuterated analogs (PDA) of Example 2. The Formula (XA) is a generic formula of deuterated Example 2, wherein Y1a, Y1b, Y1c, Y2, Y3a, Y3b, Y4, Y5, Y6, Y7, Y8a, Y8b, Y8c, Y9a, Y9band Y10are each independently H or D (deuterium) and wherein at least one of them is D. The deuterated analogs of Example 2 in Table X-1 can be predicted based on the metabolic profile of Example 2, with MetaSite (moldiscovery.com / software / metasite / ). Y1a, Y1b, Y1c, Y2, Y3a, Y3b, Y4, Y5, Y6, Y7, Y8a, Y8b, Y8c, Y9a, Y9band Y10are predicted metabolized positions based on MetaSite predictions. Table X-1

[0525] Example X-2: Some Prophetic deuterated analogs (PDA) of Example 3 The compounds provided in Table X-2 are some prophetic deuterated analogs (PDA) of

[0526] Example 5. The Formula (XB) is a generic formula of deuterated Example 3, wherein Y1a, Y1b, Y2, Y3, Y4, Y5, Y6, Y7a, Y7b, Y7c, Y8a, Y8b, Y9a, Y9b, Y10aand Y10bare each independently H or D and wherein at least one of them is D. The deuterated analogs of Example 3 in Table X-2 can be predicted based on the metabolic profile of Example 3, with MetaSite (moldiscovery.com / software / metasite / ). Y1a, Y1b, Y2, Y3, Y4, Y5, Y6, Y7a, Y7b, Y7c, Y8a, Y8b, Y9a, Y9b, ywaanyiobarepredicted metabolized positions based on MetaSite predictions.

[0527]

[0528] Table X-2 Example X-3: Some Prophetic deuterated analogs (PDA) of Example 5

[0529] The compounds provided in Table X-3 are some prophetic deuterated analogs (PDA) of Example 5. The Formula (XC) is a generic formula of deuterated Example 5, wherein Y1, Y2, Y3a, Y3b, Y4a, Y4b, Y5a, Y5b, Y6a, Y6b, Y7, Y8, Y9a, Y9b, Y10aand Y10bare each independently H or D and wherein at least one of them is D. The deuterated analogs of Example 5 in Table X-3 can be predicted based on the metabolic profile of Example 5, with MetaSite (moldiscovery.com / software / metasite / ). Y1, Y2, Y3a, Y3b, Y4a, Y4b, Y5a, Y5b, Y6a, Y6b, Y7, Y8, Y9a, Y9b, Y10aand Y10bare predicted metabolized positions based on MetaSite predictions.

[0530] Table X-3

[0531] Example X-4: Some Prophetic deuterated analogs (PDA) of Example 8

[0532] The compounds provided in Table X-4 are some prophetic deuterated analogs (PDA) of Example 8. The Formula (XD) is a generic formula of deuterated Example 8, wherein Y1a, Y1b, Y1c, Y2, Y3a, Y3b, Y4, Y5, Y6, Y7, Y8a, Y8b, Y8c, Y9a, Y9band Y10are each independently H or D and at least one of them is D. The deuterated analogs of Example 8 in Table X-4 can be predicted based on the metabolic profile of Example 8, with MetaSite (moldiscovery.com / software / metasite / ). Y1a, Y1b, Y1c, Y2, Y3a, Y3b, Y4, Y5, Y6, Y7, Y8a, Y8b, Y8c, Y9a, Y9band Y10are predicted metabolized positions based on MetaSite predictions.

[0533] Table X-4

[0534]

[0535] Example X-5: Some Prophetic deuterated analogs (PDA) of Example 10

[0536] The compounds provided in Table X-5 are some prophetic deuterated analogs (PDA) of Example 10. The Formula (XE) is the generic formula of deuterated Example 10, wherein Y1a, yib, Y1c, Y2a, Y2b, Y3, Y4, Y5, Y6, Y7, Y8a, Y8b, Y8c, Y9a, Y9b, Y10aand Y10bare each independently H or D and at least one of them is D. The deuterated analogs of Example 10 in Table X-5 can be predicted based on the metabolic profile of Example 10, with MetaSite (moldiscovery.com / software / metasite / ). Y1a, Y1b, Y1c, Y2a, Y2b, Y3, Y4, Y5, Y6, Y7, Y8a, Y8b, Y8c, Y9a, Y9b, Y10aand Y10bare predicted metabolized positions based on MetaSite predictions. Table X-5

[0537] Example X-6: Some Prophetic deuterated analogs (PDA) of Example 13 The compounds provided in Table X-6 are some prophetic deuterated analogs (PDA) of

[0538] Example 13. The Formula (XF) is a generic formula of deuterated Example 13, wherein Y1a, Y1b, Y1c, Y2, Y3a, Y3b, Y4, Y5, Y6, Y7a, Y7b, Y7c, Y8, Y9a, Y9band Y10are each independently H or D and at least one of them is D. The deuterated analogs of Example 13 in Table X-6 can be predicted based on the metabolic profile of Example 13, with MetaSite (moldiscovery.com / software / metasite / ). Y1a, Y1b, Y1c, Y2, Y3a, Y3b, Y4, Y5, Y6, Y7a, Y7b, Y7c, Y8, Y9a, Y9band Y10are predicted metabolized positions based on MetaSite predictions.

[0539]

[0540] Table X-6

[0541] Example X-7: Some Prophetic deuterated analogs (PDA) of Example 14 The compounds provided in Table X-7 are some prophetic deuterated analogs (PDA) of Example 14. The Formula (XG) is a generic formula of deuterated Example 14, wherein Y1a, yib y1cY2aY2bY2cY3Y4aY4bY5Y6Y7Y8Y9aY9bY9cY10aand Y10bar© ©ach independently H or D and at least one of them is D. The deuterated analogs of Example 14 in Table X-7 can be predicted based on the metabolic profile of Example 14, with MetaSite (moldiscovery.com / software / metasite / ). Y1a, Y1b, Y1c, Y2a, Y2b, Y2c, Y3, Y4a, Y4b, Y5, Y6, Y7, Y8, Y9a, Y9b, Y9c, Y10aand Y10bare predicted metabolized positions based on MetaSite predictions.

[0542] Table X-7

[0543] Example X-8: Some Prophetic deuterated analogs (PDA) of Example 26

[0544] The compounds provided in Table X-8 are some prophetic deuterated analogs (PDA) of Example 26. The Formula (XH) is a generic formula of deuterated Example 26 wherein Y1a, yib y1cY2aY2bY2cY3aY3bY4Y5Y6Y7Y8Y9aY9bY9cY10aand Y10bar© ©ach independently H or D and at least one of them is D. The deuterated analogs of Example 26 in Table X-8 can be predicted based on the metabolic profile of Example 26, with MetaSite (moldiscovery.com / software / metasite / ). Y1a, Y1b, Y1c, Y2a, Y2b, Y2c, Y3a, Y3b, Y4, Y5, Y6, Y7, Y8, Y9a, Y9b, Y9c, Y10aand Y10bare predicted metabolized positions based on MetaSite predictions.

[0545] Table X-8

[0546] Example X-9: Some Prophetic deuterated analogs (PDA) of Example 37

[0547] The compounds provided in Table X-9 are some prophetic deuterated analogs (PDA) of Example 37. The Formula (XI) is a generic formula of deuterated Example 37 wherein Y1a, Y1b,Y1CY2aY2b y3 y4a y4b y5 y6 y7 y8a y8b y9a y9ba ndylO ^e gchindependently H Or D and at least one of them is D. The deuterated analogs of Example 37 in Table X-9 can be predicted based on the metabolic profile of Example 37, with MetaSite

[0548] (moldiscovery.com / software / metasite / ). Y1a, Y1b, Y1c, Y2a, Y2b, Y3, Y4a, Y4b, Y5, Y6, Y7, Y8a, Y8b, Y9a, Y9band Y10are predicted metabolized positions based on MetaSite predictions. Table X-9

[0549] Example X-10: Some Prophetic deuterated analogs (PDA) of Example 38 The compounds provided in Table X-10 are some prophetic deuterated analogs (PDA) of Example 38. The Formula (XJ) is a generic formula of deuterated Example 38, wherein Y1a, y1 b ylc y2a y2b y3 y4a y4b y5 y6 y7 y8a y8b y9a y9ba n dy10g re egchindependently H Or D and at least one of them is D. The deuterated analogs of Example 38 in Table X-10 can be predicted based on the metabolic profile of Example 38, with MetaSite (moldiscovery.com / software / metasite / ). Y1a, Y1b, Y1c, Y2a, Y2b, Y3, Y4a, Y4b, Y5, Y6, Y7, Y8a, Y8b, Y9a, Y9band Y10are predicted metabolized positions based on MetaSite predictions.

[0550]

[0551] Table X-10 General methods / reviews of obtaining metabolite profile and identifying metabolites of a compound are described in: Dalvie, et al., “Assessment of Three Human in Vitro Systems in the Generation of Major Human Excretory and Circulating Metabolites,” Chemical Research in Toxicology, 2009, 22, 2, 357-368, tx8004357 (acs.org); King, R., “Biotransformations in Drug Metabolism,” Ch.3, Drug Metabolism Handbook Introduction, (doi.org / 10.1002 / 9781119851042. ch3); Wu, Y., et al, “Metabolite Identification in the Preclinical and Clinical Phase of Drug Development,” Current Drug Metabolish, 2021 , 22, 11 , 838-857, 10.2174 / 1389200222666211006104502; Godzien, J., et al, “Chapter Fifteen - Metabolite Annotation and Identification”.

[0552] Numerous publicly available and commercially available software tools are available to aid in the predictions of metabolic pathways and metabolites of compounds. Examples of such tools include, BioTransformer 3.0 (biotransformer.ca / new) which predicts the metabolic biotransformations of small molecules using a database of known metabolic reactions; MetaSite (moldiscovery.com / software / metasite / ) which predicts metabolic transformations related to cytochrome P450 and flavin-containing monooxygenase mediated reactions in phase I metabolism; and Lhasa Meteor Nexus (lhasalimited.org / products / meteor-nexus.htm) offers prediction of metabolic pathways and metabolite structures using a range of machine learning models, which covers phase I and phase II biotransformations of small molecules.

[0553] Example X-1 to Example X-10 in Table X-1 to Table X-10 may afford certain therapeutic advantages resulting from greater metabolic stability, for example increased in vivo half-life, reduced dosage requirements, reduced CYP450 inhibition (competitive or time dependent), or an improvement in therapeutic index or tolerability.

[0554] A person with ordinary skill may make additional deuterated analogs of Example X-1 to Example X-10 in Table X-1 to Table X-10 with different combinations as provided in Table X-1 to Table X-10. Such additional deuterated analogs may provide similar therapeutic advantages that may be achieved by the deuterated analogs.

[0555] Example AA. Functional In Vitro GIPR Antagonist Potency Assay

[0556] The functional in vitro antagonist potency for test compounds was determined by monitoring intracellular cyclic adenosine monophosphate (cAMP) levels in Chinese hamster ovary (CHO)-K1 cells stably expressing the human Glucose-dependent Insulinotropic Polypeptide Receptor (hGIPR). Following agonist activation, hGIPR associates with the G- protein complex causing the Gas subunit to exchange bound guanosine diphosphate (GDP) for guanosine triphosphate (GTP), followed by dissociation of the Gas-GTP complex. The activated Gas subunit can couple to downstream effectors to regulate the levels of second messengers or cAMP within the cell. Thereby, determination of intracellular cAMP levels allows for pharmacological characterization. Intracellular cAMP levels are quantitated using a homogenous assay utilizing the Homogeneous Time Resolved Fluorescence (HTRF) technology from Perkin Elmer. The method is a competitive immunoassay between native cAMP produced by the cells and cAMP labelled with the acceptor dye, d2. The two entities compete for binding to a monoclonal anti-cAMP antibody labeled with cryptate. The specific signal is inversely proportional to the concentration of cAMP in the cells.

[0557] Test compounds were solubilized to a concentration of 30 mM in 100% dimethyl sulfoxide (DMSO). An 1 1 -point dilution series using 1 in 3.162-fold serial dilutions was created in 100% DMSO with a top concentration of 8 mM. The serially diluted compound was spotted with an Echo Acoustic liquid handler (Beckman Coulter) into a 384-well assay plate (Corning, Cat No. 3824) at 50 nL / well with duplicate points at each concentration, at a 200x final assay concentration (FAC). The final compound concentration range in the assay was 40 pM to 400 pM, with a final DMSO concentration of 0.5%.

[0558] Frozen assay-ready vials (at 1x107cells / vial) of CHO-K1 cells stably expressing the Gs- coupled human GIPR receptor (Eurofins, DiscoverX, Cat No. 95-0146C2) were thawed, counted, and resuspended in assay buffer consisting of Hank’s Balanced Salt Solution (HBSS, Lonza Cat No. 10-527) containing 20 mM (4-(2-hydroxyethyl)-1 -piperazineethanesulfonic acid (HEPES, Lonza, Cat No. 17-737E), 0.1 % bovine serum albumin (BSA, Sigma, Cat No. A7979), and 200 pM 3-isobutyl-1 -methylxanthine (IBMX, Sigma, Cat No. I5879) at a density of 4x105cells / mL. Cells were added to assay plate (5 pL / well of 4x105cells / mL stock for 2,000 cells / well final) containing 50 nL of 200x FAC test compound, and incubated at 37 °C (95% O2: 5% CO2) for 2 hours, with micro-clime lids (Labcyte, Cat No. LLS-0310). Following the 2-hour cell and compound incubation, a stimulation mix comprised of hGIPR agonist human glucosedependent insulinotropic polypeptide (hGIP, full length, Sigma Cat No. G2269) in assay buffer / 0.1 % DMSO was added to the assay plate (5 pL / well) at an estimated EC8o FAC (based on previous hGIP agonist curves) and incubated for another 30 minutes with micro-clime lids at 37 °C (95% O2: 5% CO2), after which intracellular cAMP levels were quantified as per Perkin Elmer’s protocol (5 pL of d2 and then 5 pL cryptate, incubated for 1 hour at room temperature). Emission spectra of samples were measured on a Pherastar plate reader (BMG Labtech Inc) using a HTRF protocol (excitation, 320 nm; emission, 665 nm / 620 nm). hGIP EC50 was determined daily by incubating cells (5 pL / well of 4x105cells / mL stock, for 2,000 cells / well final) with 50 nL 100% DMSO for 2 hours at 37 °C (95% O2: 5% CO2), with a micro-clime lid. Following the 2-hour cell and DMSO incubation, a hGIP concentration response curve at 2x FAC (12-point curve using 1 in 3 serial dilutions, with triplicate points at each concentration, 100 nM final top concentration) in assay buffer / 1 % DMSO was added (5 pL / well) and incubated for a further 30 minutes with a micro-clime lid at 37 °C (95% O2: 5% CO2), after which intracellular cAMP levels were quantified and samples measured as described previously. Experiments passed quality control if the agonist concentration used for stimulation fell between the on-the-day EC5o-EC9o. Data were analyzed using the ratio of fluorescence intensity at 620 and 665 nm for each well, extrapolated from the cAMP standard curve to express data as nanomolar (nM) cAMP for each well. Data expressed as nM cAMP were then normalized to control wells using ActivityBase (IDBS data management software). Zero percent effect (ZPE) was defined as nM cAMP generated from the hGIP stimulation mix, while 100% effect, or one hundred percent effect (HPE), was defined as nM cAMP generated from the combined effects of hGIP simulation mix + antagonism by 80 pM of (-)-3-(6-(2-methyl-1-(4'-(trifluoromethyl)biphenyl-4- yl)propylamino)nicotinamido)propanoic acid as GIPR antagonist. The concentration and % effect values for each compound were plotted by ActivityBase using a four-parameter logistic dose response equation, and the concentration required for 50% inhibition (IC50) was determined.

[0559] Table 2 lists biological activities (IC50 values) and compound names for Examples 1- 39.

[0560] Table 2. Biological activity and Compound name for Examples 1- 39.

[0561] 1 . Values represent the geometric mean

[0562] Throughout this application, various publications are referenced. The disclosures of these publications in their entireties are hereby incorporated by reference into this application for all purposes.

[0563] It will be apparent to those skilled in the art that various modifications and variations can be made in the present invention without departing from the scope or spirit of the invention. Other embodiments of the invention will be apparent to those skilled in the art from consideration of the specification and practice of the invention disclosed herein. It is intended that the specification and examples be considered as exemplary only, with a true scope and spirit of the invention being indicated by the following claims.

Claims

CLAIMSWHAT IS CLAIMED IS:1 . A compound of Formula I:or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein:R1is H, halogen, -CN, -OR1C, Ci-8alkyl, C2-8 alkenyl, -C1-4 alkyl-(C3-6 cycloalkyl), or C3-6 cycloalkyl, wherein each of the C1-4 alkoxy, C1-4 haloalkoxy, C1-8 alkyl, C2-8 alkenyl, -C1-4 alkyl- (C3-6 cycloalkyl), or C3-6 cycloalkyl is optionally substituted with 1 , 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6 substituents each independently selected from halogen, -OH, -CN, C1-4 alkyl, C1-4 haloalkyl, C1-4 alkoxy, and C1-4 haloalkoxy;R1Cis C1-6 alkyl, C1-6 haloalkyl, C3-6 cycloalkyl, or -Ci-2 alkyl-(Cs-6 cycloalkyl), wherein each of the C3-6 cycloalkyl and -C1-2 alkyl-(C3-6 cycloalkyl) is optionally substituted with 1 , 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6 substituents each independently selected from halogen, C1-4 alkyl, C1-4 haloalkyl, C1-4 alkoxy, and C1-4 haloalkoxy; each of T1, T2, T3, and T4is independently CR4or N, provided that only 0, 1 , or 2 of T1, T2, T3, and T4can be N; each R4is independently H, halogen, -CN, C3-6 cycloalkyl, (C3-6 cycloalkyl)-Ci-2 alkyl-, C1- 4 alkyl, C1-4 cyanoalkyl, C1-4 haloalkyl, C1-4 alkoxy, or C1-4 haloalkoxy; or R1and an adjacent R4, together with the two ring carbon atom to which they are attached, optionally form a fused 4- or 6- membered cycloalkyl ring, a fused 4- or 6- membered heterocycloalkyl ring, a fused 5- or 6- membered heteroaryl ring, or a fused 6-membered aryl ring, wherein each of the fused rings is optionally substituted with 1 , 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6 substituents each independently selected from halogen, -OH, -CN, C1-4 alkyl, C1-4 haloalkyl, C1-4 alkoxy, and C1-4 haloalkoxy; t1 , L1, and L2are(a) t1 is 0 or 1 , L1is C(RL1)2or [C(RL1)2]2, and L2is NRN;(b) t1 is 0 or 1 , L1is C(RL1)2, O, or NRN, and L2is C(RL2)2; or(c) t1 is 1 , and -L1-L2- is -C(RL1)2-O-C(RL2)2-, -[C(RL1)2]3-, -C(RL1)2-N(RN)-C(RL2)2-, or a divalent C3-6 cycloalkyl ring optionally substituted with 1 , 2, 3, 4, or 5 substituents each independently selected from halogen, -OH, -CN, C1-4 alkyl, C1-4 haloalkyl, C1-4 alkoxy, C1-4 haloalkoxy; each of RL1and RL2is independently H, Ci-2alkyl, Ci-2haloalkyl, Ci-2alkoxy, or Ci-2haloalkoxy; or two RL1, together with the carbon atom to which they are attached, optionally form C3.6cycloalkyl or a 3- to 6-membered heterocycloalkyl, each of which is optionally substituted with 1 , 2, 3, or 4 substituents each independently selected from halogen, -OH, C1-4 alkyl, C1-4 haloalkyl, C1-4 alkoxy, and C1-4 haloalkoxy; or two RL2, together with the carbon atom to which they are attached, optionally form C3.6cycloalkyl or a 3- to 6-membered heterocycloalkyl, each of which is optionally substituted with 1 , 2, 3, or 4 substituents each independently selected from halogen, -OH, C1-4 alkyl, C1-4 haloalkyl, C1-4 alkoxy, and C1-4 haloalkoxy; or -C(RL1)2-C(RL2)2- together optionally forms C3.6cycloalkyl or a 4- to 6-membered heterocycloalkyl, each of which is optionally substituted with 1 , 2, 3, or 4 substituents each independently selected from halogen, -OH, C1-4 alkyl, C1-4 haloalkyl, C1-4 alkoxy, and C1-4 haloalkoxy;RNis H, C1-6 alkyl, C3.6cycloalkyl, -C1-4 alkyl-(C3.6cycloalkyl); each R2is independently halogen, -OH, C1-4 alkyl, C1-4 haloalkyl, C1-4 alkoxy, C1-4 haloalkoxy, C3-4cycloalkyl, or -Ci.4alkyl-(C3.6cycloalkyl), wherein each of the C1-4 alkyl, C1-4 haloalkyl, C1-4 alkoxy, C1-4 haloalkoxy, C3.4 cycloalkyl, or -C1-4 alkyl-(C3.6 cycloalkyl) is optionally substituted with 1 , 2, or 3 substituents each independently selected from halogen, -OH, C1-4 alkyl, C1-4 haloalkyl, C1-4 alkoxy, and C1-4 haloalkoxy, provided that when a R2is attached to a ring-forming nitrogen atom of the ring having the variable n1 , then the R2is not halogen, -OH, an optionally substituted C1-4 alkoxy, or an optionally substituted C1-4 haloalkoxy; or two R2, when attached to a same ring-forming carbon atom of the ring having the variable n1 , together with the ring-forming carbon atom to which they are attached, optionally form C3-6 cycloalkyl or a 4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl, each of which is optionally substituted with 1 , 2, 3, or 4 substituents each independently selected from halogen, -OH, C1-4 alkyl, C1-4 haloalkyl, C1-4 alkoxy, and C1-4 haloalkoxy; or two R2, when attached to two adjacent ring-forming atoms of the ring having the variable n1 , together with the two ring-forming atoms to which they are attached, optionally form a fused C3.6 cycloalkyl group or a fused 4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl group, each of which is optionally substituted with 1 , 2, 3, or 4 substituents each independently selected from halogen, -OH, C1-4 alkyl, C1-4 haloalkyl, C1-4 alkoxy, and C1-4 haloalkoxy;A1and n1 are(i) A1is CH2, and n1 is 1 ; or(ii) A1is CH2, O, S, or NH, and n1 is 2;R3is R3a ,R3b,R3c,R3d,R3e,Q r R3f-each of T5, T6, T7, and T8is independently CR5or N, provided that only 0, 1 , or 2 of T5, T6, T7, and T8can be N; each R5is independently H, halogen, -CN, C3.6cycloalkyl, (C3.6cycloalkyl)-Ci.2alkyl-, Ci- 4 alkyl, C1-4 cyanoalkyl, C1-4 haloalkyl, C1-4 alkoxy, or C1-4 haloalkoxy; each of T9, T10, T11, and T12is independently CR6or N, provided that only 0, 1 , or 2 of T9, T10, T11, and T12can be N; each R6is independently H, halogen, -CN, C3.6cycloalkyl, (C3.6cycloalkyl)-Ci.2alkyl-, C1- 4 alkyl, C1-4 cyanoalkyl, C1-4 haloalkyl, C1-4 alkoxy, or C1-4 haloalkoxy; each of RLT1and RLT2is independently H, Ci-2alkyl, Ci-2haloalkyl, C3.6cycloalkyl, or -C1- 2 alkyl-(C3.6cycloalkyl); or two RLT1, together with the carbon atom to which they are attached, optionally form C3-6 cycloalkyl or a 3- to 6-membered heterocycloalkyl, each of which is optionally substituted with 1 , 2, 3, or 4 substituents each independently selected from halogen, -OH, C1-4 alkyl, C1-4 haloalkyl, C1-4 alkoxy, and C1-4 haloalkoxy;RAis -C(=O)-OH, -C(RL3)2-C(=O)-OH, -C(RL3)2-C(RL4)2-C(=O)-OH, -[C(RL3)2]3-C(=O)-OH, -O-C(RL3)2-C(=O)-OH, -O-C(RL3)2-C(RL4)2-C(=O)-OH, -O-[C(RL3)2]3-C(=O)-OH, OH, -C(=O)NH- C(RL3)2-C(=O)-OH, -C(=O)NH-C(RL3)2-C(RL4)2-C(=O)-OH, -C(=O)NH-[C(RL3)2]3-C(=O)-OH, - C(=O)-N(R7)(R8), -C(=O)-OR9, 1 / 7-tetrazol-5-yl, 3-hydroxyisoxazol-5-yl, 5(4H)-oxo-1 ,2,4- oxadiazol-3-yl-, 5(4 / 7)-oxo-1 ,2,4-thiadiazol-3-y I-, 2-thioxo-1 ,3,4-oxadiazol-5-yl-, 4 / 7-1 ,2,4-triazol- 3-yl-, 4-hydroxy-1 ,2,5-oxadiazol-3-yl, 1 -hydroxypyrazol-5-yl, 3-hydroxy-1 / 7-pyrazol-1 -yl-, a carboxylic acid bioisostere group, -S(=O)2NHCF3, or -C(=O)-NH-S(=O)2-R10° wherein R100is C1-6alkyl or phenyl and where the phenyl is optionally substituted with 1 , 2, 3, or 4 substituents each independently selected from halogen, -OH, C1-4 alkyl, C1-4 haloalkyl, C1-4 alkoxy, and C1-4 haloalkoxy; each of RL3and RL4is independently H, Ci-2alkyl, Ci-2haloalkyl, Ci-2alkoxy, or Ci-2haloalkoxy;or two RL3, together with the carbon atom to which they are attached, optionally form C3.6cycloalkyl or a 3- to 6-membered heterocycloalkyl, each of which is optionally substituted with 1 , 2, 3, or 4 substituents each independently selected from halogen, -OH, Ci-4alkyl, Ci-4haloalkyl, Ci.4alkoxy, and Ci-4haloalkoxy; or two RL4, together with the carbon atom to which they are attached, optionally form C3. e cycloalkyl or a 3- to 6-membered heterocycloalkyl, each of which is optionally substituted with 1 , 2, 3, or 4 substituents each independently selected from halogen, -OH, Ci-4alkyl, Ci-4haloalkyl, Ci.4alkoxy, and Ci-4haloalkoxy; or -C(RL3)2-C(RL4)2- together optionally forms a divalent C3.6cycloalkyl or a divalent 4- to 6-membered heterocycloalkyl, each of which is optionally substituted with 1 , 2, 3, or 4 substituents each independently selected from halogen, -OH, Ci-4alkyl, Ci-4haloalkyl, Ci-4alkoxy, and Ci-4haloalkoxy; each of R7and R8is independently H, CI-B alkyl, C3.e cycloalkyl, -Ci-4alkyl-(C3.6 cycloalkyl), phenyl, or -Ci-4alkyl-phenyl, wherein each of the Ci-e alkyl, C3-e cycloalkyl, -Ci-4alkyl-(C3.6cycloalkyl), phenyl, or -Ci-4alkyl-phenyl is optionally substituted with 1 , 2, 3, 4, or 5 substituents each independently selected from halogen, -OH, -CN, Ci-4alkyl, Ci-4haloalkyl, Ci-4alkoxy, Ci-4haloalkoxy, C3.4cycloalkyl, or -Ci.4alkyl-(C3.4cycloalkyl); or R7and R8, together with the nitrogen atom to which they are attached, form a 4- to 8- membered heterocycloalkyl optionally substituted with 1 , 2, 3, 4, or 5 substituents each independently selected from halogen, -OH, -CN, Ci-4alkyl, Ci-4haloalkyl, Ci-4alkoxy, Ci-4haloalkoxy, C3.4cycloalkyl, or -Ci.4alkyl-(C3.4cycloalkyl), wherein each of the Ci-4alkyl, Ci.4haloalkyl, Ci-4alkoxy, Ci-4haloalkoxy, C3.4cycloalkyl, or -Ci-4alkyl-(C3.4cycloalkyl) is optionally substituted with 1 , 2, or 3 substituents each independently selected from halogen, -OH, Ci-4alkyl, Ci-4haloalkyl, Ci-4alkoxy, and Ci.4haloalkoxy;R9is Ci-6alkyl, C3.6cycloalkyl, -Ci-4alkyl-(C3.6cycloalkyl), phenyl, or -Ci.4alkyl-phenyl, each of which is optionally substituted with 1 , 2, 3, 4, or 5 substituents each independently selected from halogen, -OH, -CN, Ci-4alkyl, Ci-4haloalkyl, Ci-4alkoxy, Ci-4haloalkoxy, C3.4cycloalkyl, or -Ci.4alkyl-(C3.4cycloalkyl); each Rcyis independently halogen, -OH, Ci-4alkyl, Ci-4haloalkyl, Ci-4hydroxylalkyl, Ci-4alkoxy, Ci-4haloalkoxy, C3.4cycloalkyl, or -Ci-4alkyl-(C3.4cycloalkyl); or two Rcy, together with a same ring carbon atom of the piperidine ring to which they are attached, form C3.6cycloalkyl that is optionally substituted with 1 , 2, 3, 4, or 5 substituents each independently selected from halogen, -OH, -CN, Ci-4alkyl, Ci.4haloalkyl, Ci-4alkoxy, Ci-4haloalkoxy, C3.4cycloalkyl, or -Ci-4alkyl-(C3.4cycloalkyl); or two Rcy, each of which is attached to a different ring-forming atom of the piperidine ring, are linked together form a single bond or a moiety of -CH2-, -CH2CH2-, -CH2CH2CH2-, or - CH2CH2CH2-, which moiety is optionally substituted with 1 , 2, 3, or 4 substituents eachindependently selected from halogen, -OH, -CN, Ci-4alkyl, Ci-4haloalkyl, Ci-4alkoxy, Ci-4haloalkoxy, C3.4cycloalkyl, or -Ci.4alkyl-(C3.4cycloalkyl); t2 is 0, 1 , 2, 3, or 4; and t3 is 0, 1 , 2, 3, or 4.

2. The compound of claim 1 , wherein the compound of Formula I is a compound of Formula la:or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.

3. The compound of claim 1 , wherein the compound of Formula I is a compound of Formula II, Ila, III, Illa, IV, IVa, V, Va, VI, Via, VII, Vila, VIII, Villa, IX, IXa, X, or Xa:IXaXa or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.

4. The compound of claim 1 , wherein the compound of Formula I is a compound of Formula IX-1 , IXa-1 , IX-2, IXa-2, IX-3, or IXa-3:IXa-3 or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.

5. The compound of any one of claims 1 to 4, wherein R1is cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl, R1a, R1b, or R1c,wherein each of the cyclopropyl or cyclobutyl is optionally substituted with 1 , 2, 3, or 4 Rs; each R20is independently H, halogen, -OH, C1-2 alkyl, C1-2 haloalkyl, C1-2 alkoxy, or Ci-2 haloalkoxy; each R21is independently H, C1-2 alkyl, or C1-2 haloalkyl;R22is H, halogen, Ci-2alkyl, Ci-2hydroxylalkyl, Ci-2haloalkyl, Ci-2alkoxy, or Ci-2haloalkoxy; each R23is independently halogen, Ci-2alkyl, Ci-2hydroxylalkyl, Ci-2haloalkyl, Ci-2alkoxy, or Ci-2haloalkoxy; and each Rsis independently halogen, -OH, Ci-2alkyl, Ci-2hydroxylalkyl, Ci-2haloalkyl, Ci-2alkoxy, or Ci-2haloalkoxy.

6. The compound of any one of claims 1 to 4, wherein R1is propan-2-yl, prop-1 -en-2-yl, or cyclo propyl.

7. The compound of any one of claims 1 to 4, wherein R1is Ci-4haloalkyl or Ci-4haloalkoxy.

8. The compound of any one of claims 1 to 7, wherein each of T1, T2, T3, and T4is independently CR4.

9. The compound of any one of claims 1 to 7, wherein one of T1, T2, T3, and T4is N, and the other three are each independently CR4.

10. The compound of any one of claims 1 to 9, wherein n1 is 1 or 2 and A1is CH2.1 1 . The compound of any one of claims 1 to 10, wherein each R2is independently halogen, -OH, Ci-4alkyl, Ci-4hydroxylalkyl, Ci-4haloalkyl, Ci-4alkoxy, Ci-4haloalkoxy, C3.4cycloalkyl, or - Ci-4alkyl-(C3-4cycloalkyl); and t2 is 0, 1 , or 2.

12. The compound of any one of claims 1 to 1 1 , wherein each Rcyis independently halogen, -OH, Ci-4alkyl, Ci-4haloalkyl, Ci-4hydroxylalkyl, Ci-4alkoxy, Ci-4haloalkoxy, C3.4cycloalkyl, or - Ci-4alkyl-(C3.4cycloalkyl); and t3 is 0, 1 , or 2.

13. The compound of any one of claims 1 to 12, wherein: each of T5, T6, T7, and T8is independently CR5; orT5is N and each of T6, T7, and T8independently CR5; orT6is N and each of T5, T7, and T8independently CR5.

14. The compound of any one of claims 1 to 12, wherein each of T9, T10, T11, and T12is independently CR6; or one of T9, T10, T11, and T12is N and the other three are each independently CR6.

15. The compound of any one of claims 1 to 14 wherein RAis -C(=O)-OH.

16. A compound selected from the group consisting of:6-{4-[(1-{[3-fluoro-4-(propan-2-yl)phenyl]carbamoyl}-D-prolyl)amino]piperidin-1-yl}-2- methylpyridine-3-carboxylic acid;3-fluoro-4-{4-[(1-{[3-fluoro-4-(propan-2-yl)phenyl]carbamoyl}-D-prolyl)amino]piperidin-1- yljbenzoic acid;4-{4-[(1-{[4-(trifluoromethyl)phenoxy]acetyl}-D-prolyl)amino]piperidin-1-yl}benzoic acid;4-{4-[(1-{[3-fluoro-4-(propan-2-yl)phenyl]carbamoyl}-D-prolyl)amino]piperidin-1-yl}-2- methylbenzoic acid;4-{4-[(1-{[3-methyl-4-(propan-2-yl)phenyl]carbamoyl}-D-prolyl)amino]piperidin-1- yljbenzoic acid;3-methyl-4-{4-[(1-{[4-(propan-2-yl)phenyl]carbamoyl}-D-prolyl)amino]piperidin-1- yljbenzoic acid;2-methyl-6-{4-[(1-{[3-methyl-4-(propan-2-yl)phenyl]carbamoyl}-D-prolyl)amino]piperidin- 1-yl}pyridine-3-carboxylic acid;2-methyl-4-{4-[(1-{[3-methyl-4-(propan-2-yl)phenyl]carbamoyl}-D-prolyl)amino]piperidin- 1-yl}benzoic acid;2-methyl-4-{4-[(1-{[4-(trifluoromethoxy)phenyl]carbamoyl}-D-prolyl)amino]piperidin-1- yljbenzoic acid; and3-methyl-4-{4-[(1-{[4-(trifluoromethoxy)phenyl]carbamoyl}-D-prolyl)amino]piperidin-1- yljbenzoic acid, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.

17. A pharmaceutical composition comprising a compound of any one of claims 1 to 16 and a pharmaceutically acceptable excipient.

18. Use of a compound of any one of claims 1 to 16 for treating or preventing a condition, disease, or disorder, or use of a compound of any one of claims 1 to 16 in manufacturing a medicament for treating or preventing a condition, disease, or disorder, wherein the condition, disease, or disorder is selected from the group consisting of diabetes [e.g. Type 1 diabetes mellitus (T1 D), Type 2 diabetes mellitus (T2DM), including pre-diabetes], idiopathic T1 D (Type 1 b), latent autoimmune diabetes in adults (LADA), early-onset T2DM (EOD), youth-onset atypical diabetes (YOAD), maturity onset diabetes of the young (MODY), malnutrition-related diabetes, gestational diabetes, hyperglycemia, insulin resistance, hepatic insulin resistance, impaired glucose tolerance, diabetic neuropathy, diabetic nephropathy, kidney disease [e.g., acute kidney disorder, tubular dysfunction, proinflammatory changes to the proximal tubules, or chronic kidney disease (CKD)], diabetic retinopathy, adipocyte dysfunction, visceral adiposedeposition, sleep apnea [e.g. obstructive sleep apnea (OSA)], obesity (including hypothalamic obesity and monogenic obesity) and related comorbidities (e.g., osteoarthritis and urine incontinence), eating disorders (including binge eating syndrome, bulimia nervosa, and syndromic obesity such as Prader-Willi and Bardet-Biedl syndromes), weight gain such as weight gain caused by use of other agents (e.g., caused by use of steroids and / or antipsychotics, or caused by treatment of depression, or caused by use of agents on cognitive function), overweight, excessive sugar craving, dyslipidemia [including hyperlipidemia, hypertriglyceridemia, increased total cholesterol, high LDL (low-density lipoprotein) cholesterol, and low HDL (high-density lipoprotein) cholesterol], hyperinsulinemia, nonalcoholic fatty liver disease [NAFLD, including related diseases such as steatosis, nonalcoholic steatohepatitis (NASH), fibrosis, cirrhosis, and hepatocellular carcinoma], cardiovascular disease, atherosclerosis (including coronary artery disease), peripheral vascular disease, hypertension, endothelial dysfunction, impaired vascular compliance, heart failure [e.g. congestive heart failure, heart failure with preserved ejection fraction (HFpEF), heart failure with reduced ejection fraction (HFrEF)], myocardial infarction (e.g. necrosis and apoptosis), stroke, hemorrhagic stroke, ischemic stroke, traumatic brain injury, pulmonary hypertension, restenosis after angioplasty, intermittent claudication, post-prandial lipemia, metabolic acidosis, ketosis, arthritis, osteoporosis, osteoarthritis, Parkinson’s disease, left ventricular hypertrophy, peripheral arterial disease (PAD), macular degeneration, cataract, glomerulosclerosis, chronic renal failure, metabolic syndrome, syndrome X, premenstrual syndrome, angina pectoris, thrombosis, atherosclerosis, transient ischemic attacks, vascular restenosis, impaired glucose metabolism, conditions of impaired fasting plasma glucose, hyperuricemia, gout, erectile dysfunction, skin and connective tissue disorders, psoriasis, foot ulcerations, ulcerative colitis, hyper apo B lipoproteinemia, Alzheimer’s Disease, schizophrenia, impaired cognition, inflammatory bowel disease, short bowel syndrome, Crohn’s disease, colitis, irritable bowel syndrome, polycystic ovary syndrome (PCOS), and addiction (e.g., addition to alcohol, nicotine, and / or drug); or use of a compound of any one of claims 1 to 16 for weight management (e.g. chronic weight management); or use of a compound of any one of claims 1 to 16 in manufacturing a medicament for weight management (e.g. chronic weight management).

19. A method for modulating a glucose-dependent insulinotropic polypeptide receptor (GIPR) comprising contacting the GIPR with a compound of any one of clams 1 to 16.

Images